VOLVO C30 Owners Manual · 2014. 11. 19. · Change of ownership for cars with Volvo On Call *...

VOLVO C30

Owners Manual Web Edition

DEAR VOLVO OWNERTHANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo.The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and yourpassengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvohas also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmentalrequirements.

In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend thatyou familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and mainte-nance information contained in this owner's manual.

Table of contents

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

0000 Introduction

Important information................................. 8Volvo and the environment....................... 12

0101 Safety

Seatbelts................................................... 16Airbag system........................................... 19Airbags...................................................... 20Activating/deactivating the airbag*........... 22Side airbags (SIPS bags).......................... 24Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 26WHIPS....................................................... 27When the systems deploy......................... 29Crash mode.............................................. 30Child safety............................................... 31 02

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, left-hand drive cars.................. 44Overview, right-hand drive cars................ 46Driver's door control panel....................... 48Combined instrument panel...................... 49Indicator and warning symbols................. 50Information display................................... 54Electrical socket........................................ 56Lighting panel........................................... 58Left-hand stalk switch............................... 62Right-hand stalk switch............................ 65Cruise control*.......................................... 68Keypad in the steering wheel*.................. 70Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warn-ing flashers................................................ 71Parking brake............................................ 72Power windows......................................... 73Windows, rearview and door mirrors........ 75Power sunroof* ........................................ 79Personal preferences................................ 81

HomeLink *.............................................. 84

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3

0303 Climate control

General information on climate control..... 90Manual climate control, AC....................... 92Electronic climate control, ECC*............... 95Air distribution........................................... 98Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas-senger compartment heater*.................... 99Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)....... 102

0404 Interior

Front seats.............................................. 106Interior lighting........................................ 111Storage spaces in the passenger com-partment.................................................. 114Rear seat................................................. 118Cargo area.............................................. 120

0505 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade......... 126Active locks............................................. 129Keyless drive*.......................................... 130Battery in remote control key.................. 133Locking and unlocking............................ 134Alarm*..................................................... 137

Table of contents


0606 Starting and driving

General.................................................... 142Refuelling................................................ 144Alcolock*................................................. 148Starting the engine.................................. 152Starting the engine – Flexifuel................. 154Keyless drive*.......................................... 156Manual gearbox...................................... 157Automatic gearbox.................................. 158DRIVe Start-Stop*................................... 163Brake system.......................................... 167DSTC – Stability and traction control sys-tem*......................................................... 169Park Assist*............................................. 171BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System. . 173Towing and recovery.............................. 176Start assistance...................................... 180Driving with a trailer................................ 181Towing equipment*................................. 183Detachable towbar* ............................... 185Loading................................................... 189Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 190

0707 Wheels and tyres

General.................................................... 194Tyre pressure.......................................... 198Warning triangle* and spare wheel * ...... 199Changing wheels.................................... 201Emergency puncture repair*................... 203

0808 Car care

Cleaning.................................................. 210Touching up paintwork........................... 214Rustproofing........................................... 215

Table of contents


0909 Maintenance and service

Volvo service........................................... 218Self-maintenance.................................... 219Bonnet and engine compartment........... 220Oils and fluids......................................... 222Wiper blades........................................... 228Battery..................................................... 230Replacing bulbs...................................... 234Fuses...................................................... 240 10

10 Infotainment system

General.................................................... 250Audio functions....................................... 252Radio functions....................................... 257CD functions........................................... 262Menu structure – audio system.............. 265Phone functions*..................................... 266Menu structure – phone*......................... 273Bluetooth handsfree*.............................. 276 11

11 Specifications

Type designation..................................... 284Dimensions and weights......................... 286Engine specifications.............................. 289Engine oil................................................ 290Fluids and lubricants............................... 292Fuel......................................................... 295Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pres-sure ........................................................ 298Electrical system..................................... 300Type approval......................................... 302Symbols in the display............................ 303

Table of contents

6

1212 Alphabetical Index

Alphabetical Index.................................. 306

Table of contents

7

Introduction

Important information


Reading the Owner's Manual

Introduction

A good way of getting to know your new car isto read the owner's manual, ideally before yourfirst journey. This will give you the opportunityto familiarise yourself with new functions, tosee how best to handle the car in different sit-uations, and to make the best use of all thecar's features. Please pay attention to thesafety instructions contained in the manual.

The specifications, design features and illus-trations in this owner's manual are not binding.We reserve the right to make modificationswithout prior notice.© Volvo Car Corporation

Option

All types of option/accessory are marked withan asterisk*.

In addition to standard equipment, this manualalso describes options (factory fitted equip-ment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extraequipment).

The equipment described in the owner's man-ual is not available in all cars - they have dif-ferent equipment depending on adaptationsfor the needs of different markets and nationalor local laws and regulations.

In the event of uncertainty over what is stand-ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvodealer.

Special texts

WARNING

Warning texts advise of a risk of personalinjury.

IMPORTANT

Important texts advise of a risk of materialdamage.

NOTE

NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitatethe use of features and functions for exam-ple.

Footnote

There is footnote information in the owner'smanual that is located at the bottom of thepage. This information is an addition to the textthat it refers to via a number. If the footnoterefers to text in a table then letters are usedinstead of numbers for referral.

Message texts

There are displays in the car that show textmessages. These text messages are high-

lighted in the owner's manual by means of thetext being slightly larger and printed in grey.Examples of this are in menu texts and mes-sage texts on the information display (e.g.AUDIO SETTINGS).

Decals

The car contains different types of decal whichare designed to convey important informationin a simple and clear manner. The decals in thecar have the following descending degree ofimportance for the warning/information.

Warning for personal injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,white text/image on black message field. Usedto indicate the presence of danger which, if the

Introduction


9

warning is ignored, may result in serious per-sonal injury or fatality.

Risk of property damage

G031592

White ISO symbols and white text/image onblack or blue warning field and message field.Used to indicate the presence of danger which,if the warning is ignored, may result in damageto property.

Information

G031593

White ISO symbols and white text/image onblack message field.

NOTE

The labels shown in the owner's manual arenot provided as exact reproductions ofthose in the car. The purpose is to showtheir approximate appearance and locationin the car. The information that applies toyour car in particular is available on the labelin question in your car.

Procedure lists

Procedures where action must be taken in acertain sequence are numbered in the owner'smanual.

When there is a series of illustrations forstep-by-step instructions each step isnumbered in the same way as the corres-ponding illustration.

There are numbered lists with letters adja-cent to the series of illustrations where theorder of the instructions is not significant.

Arrows appear numbered and unnum-bered and are used to illustrate a move-ment.

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions then the different steps arenumbered with normal numbers.

Position lists

Red circles containing a number are usedin overview images where different com-ponents are pointed out. The numberrecurs in the position list featured in con-nection with the illustration that describesthe item.

Bulleted lists

A bulleted list is used when there is a list ofpoints in the owner's manual.

Example:

Introduction



• Coolant

• Engine oil

To be continued

�� This symbol is located furthest down to theright when a section continues on the followingpage.

Recording data

Your vehicle contains a number of computerswhose function is to continuously check andmonitor the vehicle's operation and function-ality. Some of the computers can record infor-mation during normal driving if they detect anerror. In addition, information is recorded in theevent of a crash or incident. Parts of the recor-ded information are required so that techni-cians can diagnose and rectify faults in thevehicle during servicing and maintenance andso that Volvo can fulfil legal requirements andother regulations. In addition to this, the infor-mation is used for research purposes by Volvoin order to continually develop quality andsafety, as the information can contribute to abetter understanding of the factors that causeaccidents and injuries. The informationincludes details of the status and functionalityof various systems and modules in the vehiclewith regard to engine, throttle, steering andbrake systems, amongst other things. Thisinformation may include details regarding the

way the driver drives the vehicle, such as vehi-cle speed, brake and accelerator pedal use,steering wheel movement and whether or notthe driver and passengers have used theirseatbelts. For the reasons given this informa-tion may be stored in the vehicle's computersfor a certain length of time, but also as a resultof a collision or incident. This information maybe stored by Volvo as long as it can help tofurther develop and further enhance safety andquality and as long as there are legal require-ments and other regulations that Volvo needsto consider.

Volvo will not contribute to the above-descri-bed information being disclosed to third partieswithout the vehicle owner's consent. However,due to national legislation and regulationsVolvo may be required to disclose such infor-mation to authorities such as police authorities,or others who may assert a legal right to haveaccess to it.

To be able to read and interpret the informationrecorded by the computers in the vehiclerequires special technical equipment thatVolvo, and workshops that have entered intoagreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvois responsible that the information, which istransferred to Volvo during servicing and main-tenance, is stored and handled in a securemanner and that the handling complies with

applicable legal requirements. For further infor-mation - contact a Volvo dealer.

Accessories and extra equipment

The incorrect connection and installation ofaccessories can negatively affect the car'selectrical system. Certain accessories onlyfunction when their associated software isinstalled in the car's computer system. Wetherefore recommend that you always contactan authorised Volvo workshop before installingaccessories which are connected to or affectthe electrical system.

Change of ownership for cars withVolvo On Call *

Volvo On Call is a supplemental service thatconsists of safety, security and comfort serv-ices. If the car has Volvo On Call and there is achange of owner, it is very important that theseservices are discontinued so that the formerowner cannot access the services in the car.Contact the call centre by pressing the ON

CALL button in the car or contact an author-ised Volvo workshop. See also "Changing thesecurity code" in the owner's manual for VolvoOn Call.

Introduction


11

Information on the Internet

At www.volvocars.com there is further infor-mation concerning your car.

Introduction

Volvo and the environment


Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy

G000000

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-ration's core values which influence all opera-tions. We also believe that our customers shareour consideration for the environment.

Your Volvo complies with strict internationalenvironmental standards and is also manufac-tured in one of the cleanest and most resource-efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo-ration has global ISO certification, whichincludes the environmental standard ISO14001 covering all factories and several of ourother units. We also set requirements for ourpartners so that they work systematically withenvironmental issues.

Fuel consumption

Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumptionin each of their respective classes. Lower fuelconsumption generally results in lower emis-sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.

It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con-sumption. For more information read under theheading, Reducing environmental impact.

Efficient emission control

Your Volvo is manufactured following the con-cept "Clean inside and out" – a concept thatencompasses a clean interior environment aswell as highly efficient emission control. In

many cases the exhaust emissions are wellbelow the applicable standards.

Clean air in the passenger compartment

A passenger compartment filter prevents dustand pollen from entering the passenger com-partment via the air intake.

A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte-rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out-side.

The system consists of an electronic sensorand a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni-tored continuously and if there is an increase in

Introduction

Volvo and the environment


the level of certain unhealthy gases such ascarbon monoxide then the air intake is closed.Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,queues and tunnels for example.

The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozoneand hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbonfilter.

Interior

The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea-sant and comfortable, even for people withcontact allergies and for asthma sufferers.Extreme attention has been given to choosingenvironmentally-compatible materials.

Volvo workshops and the environment

Regular maintenance creates the conditionsfor a long service life and low fuel consumptionfor your car. In this way you contribute to acleaner environment. When Volvo's workshopsare entrusted with the service and mainte-nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-tem. We make clear demands regarding theway in which our workshops are designed inorder to prevent spills and discharges into theenvironment. Our workshop staff have theknowledge and the tools required to guaranteegood environmental care.

Reducing environmental impact

You can easily help reduce environmentalimpact - here are a few tips:

• Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off theengine when stationary for longer periods.Pay attention to local regulations.

• Drive economically - think ahead.

• Perform service and maintenance inaccordance with the owner's manual'sinstructions - follow the Service and War-ranty Booklet's recommended intervals.

• If the car is equipped with an engine blockheater*, use it before starting from cold - itimproves starting capacity and reduceswear in cold weather and the engine rea-ches normal operating temperature morequickly, which lowers consumption andreduces emissions.

• High speed increases consumption con-siderably due to increased wind resistance- a doubling of speed increases wind resis-tance 4 times.

• Always dispose of environmentally hazar-dous waste, such as batteries and oils, inan environmentally safe manner. Consult aworkshop in the event of uncertainty abouthow this type of waste should be discarded- an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-mended.

Following this advice can save money, theplanet's resources are saved, and the car'sdurability is extended. For more informationand further advice, see the pages 142 and295.

Recycling

As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it isimportant that the car is recycled in an envi-ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of thecar can be recycled. The last owner of the caris therefore requested to contact a dealer forreferral to a certified/approved recyclingfacility.

The owner's manual and theenvironment

The Forest Stewardship Council symbolshows that the paper pulp in this publicationcomes from FSC certified forests or othercontrolled sources.


Seatbelts................................................................................................. 16Airbag system......................................................................................... 19Airbags.................................................................................................... 20Activating/deactivating the airbag*......................................................... 22Side airbags (SIPS bags)........................................................................ 24Inflatable Curtain (IC).............................................................................. 26WHIPS..................................................................................................... 27When the systems deploy....................................................................... 29Crash mode............................................................................................ 30Child safety............................................................................................. 31

SAFETY

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

16

General information

G020104

Tensioning the hip strap. The belt must be posi-tioned low down.

Heavy braking can have serious consequencesif the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that allpassengers use their seatbelts. It is importantthat the seatbelt lies against the body so it canprovide maximum protection. Do not lean thebackrest too far back. The seatbelt is designedto protect in a normal seating position.

Putting on a seatbelt

– Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it bypressing the buckle into the lock. A loud"click" indicates that the seatbelt haslocked.

Releasing the seatbelt

– Press the red lock button and then let theseatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does notretract fully, feed the seatbelt in by hand sothat it does not hang loose.

The seatbelt locks and cannot be with-

drawn:

• if it is pulled out too quickly

• during braking and acceleration

• if the car leans heavily.

Keep in mind the following

• do not use clips or anything else that canprevent the seatbelt from fitting properly

• ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted orcaught on anything

• the hip strap must be positioned low down(not over the abdomen)

• tension the hip strap over the lap by pullingthe diagonal shoulder belt as illustrated.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-belt is not used or is used incorrectly, thismay diminish the protection provided by theairbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING

Each seatbelt is designed for only one per-son.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelt yourself.Volvo recommends that you contact anauthorised Volvo workshop. If the seatbelthas been subjected to a major load, such asin conjunction with a collision, the entireseatbelt must be replaced. Some of theseatbelt's protective properties may havebeen lost even if the seatbelt does notappear damaged. The seatbelt must also bereplaced if it shows signs of wear or dam-age. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation atthe same location as the replaced seatbelt.

WARNING

The rear seat is designed for a maximum oftwo passengers.

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

��

17

Seatbelts and pregnancy

G020105

The seatbelt should always be worn duringpregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in thecorrect way. The diagonal section of the seat-belt should wrap over the shoulder then berouted between the breasts and to the side ofthe abdomen.

The lap section of the seatbelt should lay flatover the thighs and as low as possible underthe abdomen. – It must never be allowed to rideupward. Remove the slack from the seatbeltand ensure that it fits as close to the body aspossible. In addition, check that there are notwists in the seatbelt.

As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant driversshould adjust their seats and steering wheel

such that they can easily maintain control of thevehicle as they drive (which means that theymust be able to easily operate the foot pedalsand steering wheel). They should strive to posi-tion the seat with as large a distance as possi-ble between their abdomen and the steeringwheel.

Seatbelt reminder

G018084

Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fastentheir seatbelts by means of an audio and visualreminder. The audio reminder is speeddependent, and in some cases time depend-ent. The visual reminder is located in the roofconsole and the combined instrument panel.

Child seats are not covered by the seatbeltreminder system.

Rear seat

The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has twosubfunctions:

• Provides information on which seatbeltsare being used in the rear seat. A messageis shown in the information display whenthe seatbelts are used. The message iscleared automatically after driving forapproximately 30 seconds or after press-ing the indicator stalk's READ button.

• Provides a warning if one of the rear seat-belts is unfastened during a journey. Thiswarning takes the form of a message onthe information display along with theaudio/visual signal. The warning ceaseswhen the seatbelt is re-fastened or whenacknowledged manually by pressing theREAD button.

The message on the information display show-ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail-able. Press the READ button to see storedmessages.

Certain markets

An audio signal and indicator lamp remind thedriver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one. Atlow speed, the audio reminder will sound forthe first 6 seconds.

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

18

Seatbelt tensioner

All the seatbelts are equipped with seatbelttensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt ten-sioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of asufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt thenprovides more effective restraint for occu-pants.

WARNING

Never insert the tongue of the passenger'sseatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side.Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt intothe buckle on the correct side. Do not makeany damages on seatbelts nor insert anyforeign objects into a buckle. The seatbeltsand buckles would then possibly not func-tion as intended in the event of a collision.There is a risk of serous injury.

Seatbelt guide

G020106

The seatbelt guide is fitted on both the driver'sseat and passenger seat.

The seatbelt guide is an aid for providing betteraccess to the seatbelt. When getting into andout of the rear seat, remove the seatbelt fromthe seatbelt guide and position it furthest backon the seatbelt bar. Refit the seatbelt into theseatbelt guide afterwards.

01 Safety

Airbag system 01

19

Warning symbol on the combinedinstrument panel

The warning symbol in the combined instru-ment panel illuminates when the remote con-trol key is turned to key position I, II or III. Thesymbol goes out after approx. 6 seconds pro-vided the airbag system is fault-free.

As well as the warning symbol, amessage may appear on the dis-play in appropriate cases. If thewarning symbol malfunctions, thewarning triangle illuminates andthe message SRS AIRBAG

SERVICE REQUIRED or SRS

AIRBAG SERVICE URGENT

appears in the display. Volvo rec-ommends that you contact an authorisedVolvo workshop immediately.

WARNING

If the warning symbol for the airbag systemremains illuminated or illuminates while driv-ing, it means that the airbag system doesnot have full functionality. The symbol indi-cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys-tem, SIPS, SRS or the IC system. Volvo rec-ommends that you contact an authorisedVolvo workshop immediately.

01 Safety

Airbags 01

20

Airbag system

G020111

SRS system, left-hand drive

The system consists of airbags and sensors. Asufficiently violent collision trips the sensorsand the airbag(s) are inflated with hot gas. Tocushion the impact, the airbag deflates whencompressed. When this occurs, smokeescapes into the car. This is completely nor-mal. The entire process, including inflation anddeflation of the airbag, takes place withintenths of a second.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that you contact anauthorised Volvo workshop for repair.Defective work in the airbag system couldcause malfunction and result in serious per-sonal injury.

G020110

SRS system, right-hand drive

NOTE

The sensors react differently depending onthe course of the collision and whether ornot the seatbelts on the driver's side andpassenger side are used.

It is therefore possible that only one (ornone) of the airbags may inflate in a colli-sion. The airbag system senses the force ofthe collision on the car and adapts accord-ingly so that one or more airbags isdeployed.

The capacities of the airbags are also adap-ted to the collision force to which they aresubjected.

01 Safety

Airbags 01

21

G020113

Location of the passenger airbag in left-hand driveand right-hand drive cars.

WARNING

Do not put objects in front of or above theinstrument panel where the passenger air-bag is located.

Airbag on the driver's side

The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-tection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver'sside. It is folded up into the centre of the steer-ing wheel. The steering wheel is marked SRS

AIRBAG.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-belt is not used or is used incorrectly, thismay diminish the protection provided by theairbag in the event of a collision.

Passenger airbag

The car has an airbag to supplement the pro-tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen-ger side. It is folded up into a compartmentabove the glovebox. The cover panel is markedSRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbagdeploys, passengers must sit as upright aspossible with their feet on the floor and backagainst the backrest. Seatbelts must besecured.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion in the front seat if the airbagis activated.1

Never allow anybody to stand or sit in frontof the front passenger seat. Children under140 cm must never sit in the front passengerseat if the airbag is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above canendanger life.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01


Key switch off - PACOS*

General information

The airbag for the front passenger seat can bedeactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). Forinformation on how to activate/deactivate, seeunder the heading Activating/deactivating.

Key switch off/switch

The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)is located on the passenger end of the instru-ment panel and is accessible when the pas-senger door is open, (see under the headingbelow, Activating/deactivating).

Check that the switch is in the required posi-tion. Volvo recommends that the key blade isused to change position.

For information on the key blade, seepage 127.

WARNING


WARNING

If the car is equipped with a front passengerairbag, but does not have a switch (PACOS),then the airbag will always be activated.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion in the front seat if the airbagis activated and the symbol in the roofconsole is illuminated. Failure to follow thisadvice could endanger the life of the child.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas-senger seat if the text message in the roofconsole indicates that the airbag is deacti-vated, and if the warning symbol for the air-bag system is also displayed on the com-bined instrument panel. This indicates thatthere has been a severe malfunction. Volvorecommends that you visit an authorisedVolvo workshop as soon as possible.

Activating/deactivating

Switch location

The airbag is activated. With the switch inthis position, children taller than 140 cmcan sit in the front passenger seat, butnever children in a child seat or on abooster cushion.

The airbag is deactivated. With the switchin this position, children in a child seat oron a booster cushion can sit in the frontpassenger seat, but never persons tallerthan 140 cm.

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01


WARNING

Activated airbag (passenger seat):

Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion on the front passenger seatwhen the airbag is activated. This applies toeveryone shorter than 140 cm.

Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):

No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit inthe front passenger seat when the airbag isdeactivated.


Messages

2

G018082

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag isdeactivated.

A text message and a symbol in the roof con-sole indicate that the airbag for the front pas-senger seat is deactivated (see preceding illus-tration).

G018083

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag isactivated.

A warning symbol in the roof console indicatesthat the airbag for the front passenger seat isactivated (see preceding illustration).

NOTE

When the remote control key is turned tokey position II or III the warning symbol forthe airbag is displayed on the combinedinstrument panel for approx. 6 seconds, seepage 19.

Following which, the indicator in the roofconsole is illuminated showing the correctstatus for the front passenger seat airbag.For more information about the different keypositions, see page 152.

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01

24

Side airbag

G020118

Side airbag locations.

In a side impact collision a large proportion ofthe collision force is transferred by the SIPS(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil-lars, the floor, the roof and other structuralparts of the body. The side airbags at the driv-er's and front passenger seats protect thechest area and are an important part of theSIPS. The side airbags are located in the frontseat backrests.

WARNING

• Volvo recommends that repairs are onlycarried out by an authorised Volvoworkshop. Defective work in the SIPS-bag system could cause malfunctionand result in serious personal injury.

• Do not place any objects in the areabetween the outside of the seat and thedoor panel, since this area is requiredby the side airbag.

• Volvo recommends the use only of carseat covers approved by Volvo. Otherseat covers may impede the operationof the side airbags.

• Side airbags are a supplement the seat-belts. Always use a seatbelt.

Child seats and side airbags

The protection provided by the car to childrenseated in a child seat or on a booster cushionis not diminished by the side airbag.

A child seat or booster cushion can be placedon the front passenger seat provided that thecar does not have an activated1 passenger air-bag.

Location

Driver's seat, left-hand drive.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 22.

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01

25

Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.

The SIPS bag system consists of side airbagsand sensors. A sufficiently violent collision tripsthe sensors and the side airbags are inflated.The airbag inflates between the occupant andthe door panel and thereby cushions the initialimpact. The airbag deflates when compressedby the collision. The side airbag is normally onlydeployed on the side of the collision.

01 Safety

Inflatable Curtain (IC) 01

26

Properties

The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is apart of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in theheadlining along both sides of the roof andprotects the car's occupants sitting in the outerseats. A sufficiently violent collision trips thesensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated.The inflatable curtain helps to prevent thedriver and passengers from striking their headson the inside of the car during a collision.

WARNING

Never hang or attach heavy items onto thehandles in the roof. The hook is onlydesigned for light clothing (not for solidobjects such as umbrellas for example).

Do not screw or install anything onto thecar's headlining, door pillars or side panels.This could compromise the intended pro-tection. Volvo recommends that you onlyever use Volvo genuine parts that areapproved for placement in these areas.

WARNING

Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under

the top edge of the side windows. Other-wise, the intended protection of the inflat-able curtain, which is concealed in the head-lining, may be compromised.

WARNING

The inflatable curtain is a supplement to theseatbelts.

Always use a seatbelt.

01 Safety

WHIPS 01

27

Protection against whiplash injury – WHIPS

G020347

The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con-sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe-cially designed head restraints for the frontseats. The system is actuated by a rear-endcollision, where the angle and speed of the col-lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle allhave an influence.

WARNING

The WHIPS system is a supplement to theseatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Properties of the seat

When the WHIPS system is deployed, the frontseat backrests are lowered backward to alterthe seating position of the driver and front seatpassenger. This reduces the risk of whiplashinjury.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPSsystem yourself. Volvo recommends thatyou contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WHIPS system and child seats/booster

cushions

The protection provided by the car to childrenseated in a child seat or on a booster cushionis not diminished by the WHIPS system.

Correct seating position

For the best possible protection, the driver andfront seat passenger should sit in the centre ofthe seat with as little space as possiblebetween the head and the head restraint.

01 Safety

WHIPS 01

28

Do not obstruct the WHIPS system

G020125

Do not leave any objects on the floor behind thedriver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent theWHIPS system from functioning.

WARNING

Do not squeeze rigid objects between therear seat cushion and the front seat back-rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct thefunction of the WHIPS system.

G020126

Do not place objects in the rear seat that may pre-vent the WHIPS system from functioning.

WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is folded down, thecorresponding front seat must be movedforward so that it does not touch the foldedbackrest.

WARNING

If a seat has been subjected to extremeforces, such as due to a rear-end collision,the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvorecommends that it is checked by anauthorised Volvo workshop.

Part of the WHIPS system's protectivecapacity may have been lost even if theseats appear to be undamaged.

Volvo recommends that you contact anauthorised Volvo workshop to have the sys-tem checked even after a minor rear-endcollision.

01 Safety

When the systems deploy 01

29

Activating the systems

System Triggered

Seatbelt tensioner, front seat In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or rear-end collision

Seatbelt tensioner, outside rear seat In a frontal collision

Airbags In a frontal collisionA

Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact accidentA

Inflatable Curtain IC In a side-impact accidentA

Whiplash protection WHIPS In a rear-end collision

A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle ofthe collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.

If the airbags have been deployed, the follow-ing is recommended:

• Recovering the car. Volvo recommendsthat you have it conveyed to an authorisedVolvo workshop. Do not drive withdeployed airbags.

• Volvo recommends that you engage anauthorised Volvo workshop to handle thereplacement of components in the car'ssafety systems.

• Always contact a doctor.

NOTE

The airbag, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys-tems are deployed only once during a colli-sion

WARNING

The airbag system's control module islocated in the centre console. If the centreconsole is drenched with water or other liq-uid, disconnect the battery cables. Do notattempt to start the car since the airbagsmay deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo rec-ommends that you have it conveyed to anauthorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Never drive with deployed airbags. Theycan make steering difficult. Other safetysystems may also be damaged. The smokeand dust created when the airbags aredeployed can cause skin and eye irritation/injury after intensive exposure. In case ofirritation, wash with cold water. The rapiddeployment sequence and airbag fabricmay cause friction and skin burns.

01 Safety

Crash mode 01

30

Driving after a collision

G029042

If the car is involved in a collision, the textCRASH MODE SEE MANUAL may appear onthe information display. This means that the carhas reduced functionality. Crash mode is aprotective state that is enforced when the col-lision may have damaged any of the car's vitalfunctions, such as the fuel lines, sensors forone of the safety systems, or the brake system.

Attempting to start the car

First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.There must be no smell of fuel either.

If everything seems normal and you havechecked for indications of fuel leakage, youmay attempt to start the car.

Firstly, remove the remote control key and thenreinsert it. The car's electronics will then try toreset themselves to normal mode. Then try tostart the car. If CRASH MODE SEE

MANUAL is still shown on the display then thecar must not be driven or towed. Even if the carappears to be driveable, hidden damage maymake the car impossible to control once mov-ing.

Moving the car

If NORMAL MODE is shown after CRASH

MODE SEE MANUAL has been reset, the carcan be moved carefully out of a dangerousposition. Do not move the car further than nec-essary.

WARNING

Never attempt to repair your car or reset theelectronics yourself if the car has been incrash mode. This could result in personalinjury or the car not functioning as normal.Volvo recommends that you always engagean authorised Volvo workshop to check andrestore the car to NORMAL MODE afterCRASH MODE SEE MANUAL has beendisplayed.

WARNING

Never, under any circumstances, attempt torestart the car if it smells of fuel when theCRASH MODE SEE MANUAL message isdisplayed. Leave the car at once.

WARNING

If the car is in crash mode it must not betowed. It must be transported from its loca-tion. Volvo recommends that you have itconveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

31

Children should sit comfortably andsafely

Volvo recommends that children travel in rear-facing child seats until as late an age as pos-sible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and thenfront-facing booster cushions/child seats untilup to 10 years of age.

The position of a child in the car and the choiceof equipment are dictated by the child's weightand size, for more information, see page 33.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the placement ofchildren in cars vary from country to coun-try. Check what does apply.

Children of all ages and sizes must always sitcorrectly secured in the car. Never allow a childto sit on the knee of a passenger.

Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,booster cushions & attachment devices) whichis designed for your particular car. Using Vol-vo's child safety equipment provides you withoptimum conditions for your child to travelsafely in the car. Furthermore, the child safetyequipment fits and is easy to use.

NOTE

In the event of questions when fitting childsafety products, contact the manufacturerfor clearer instructions.

Child seats

G020128

Child seats and airbags are not compatible.

NOTE

When using child safety products it isimportant to read the installation instruc-tions included with the product.

Do not attach the straps for the child seat tothe horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails orbeams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam-age the straps.

Look in the installation instructions for the childseat for the correct fitting.

Location of child seats

You may place:

• a child seat/booster cushion on the frontpassenger seat, provided the passengerairbag is not activated1.

• one or more child seats/booster cushionsin the rear seat.

Always fit child seats/booster cushions in therear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. Achild in the front passenger seat could sufferserious injury if the airbag deploys.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

32

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion in the front seat if the airbagis activated2.

No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sitin the front passenger seat if the airbag isactivated.


WARNING

Booster cushions/child seats with steelbraces or some other design that could reston the seatbelt buckle's opening buttonmust not be used, as they could cause theseatbelt buckle to open accidentally.

Do not allow the upper section of the childseat to rest against the windscreen.

Label Airbag

Label fitted on the end face of the instrument panelon the passenger side, see the illustration on page22.

2 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 22.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

��

33

Recommended child seats3

Weight Front seatA Rear seat

Group 0

max. 10 kg

Group 0+

max. 13 kg

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat,secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.

Type approval: E1 04301146

(L)

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat,secured with the car's seatbelt.


(U)

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat,secured with the car's seatbelt.


(U)

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protectivecushion between the child seat and the dashboard.


(L)

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.


(L)

Child seats which are universally approved.

(U)


(U)

3 With regard to other child seats the car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

34


Group 1

9 – 18 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible ChildSeat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbeltand straps.


(L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible ChildSeat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbeltand straps.B


(L)

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protectivecushion between the child seat and the dashboard.


(L)

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.B


(L)

Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIXfixture system and straps.B


(L)


(U)


(U)

01 Safety

Child safety 01

��

35


Group 2

15-25 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible ChildSeat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbeltand straps.


(L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible ChildSeat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbeltand strapsB


(L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible ChildSeat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.


(L)

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible ChildSeat) - front-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.


(L)

01 Safety

Child safety 01

36


Group 2/3

15 – 36 kg

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat withbackrest).


(UF)

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat withbackrest).


(UF)

Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushionwith and without backrest).


(UF)

Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushionwith and without backrest).


(UF)

L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.

U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.

UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.

A For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 22.B To install a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer to have the mounting points installed.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on abooster cushion in the front seat if the airbagis activated4.

No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sitin the front passenger seat if the airbag isactivated.


4 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 22.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

37

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats

G009182

Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture systemare concealed behind the lower section of therear seat backrest, in the outer seats.

The location of the mounting points is indicatedby symbols in the backrest upholstery (seeillustration above).

Press the seat cushion down to access themounting points.

Always follow the manufacturer's installationinstructions when connecting a child seat tothe ISOFIX mounting points.

Size classes

Child seats are in different sizes – cars are indifferent sizes. This means that not all childseats are suitable for all seats in all car models.

Consequently, there is a size classification forchild seats using the ISOFIX fixture system inorder to assist users in choosing the correctchild seat (see the following table).

Sizeclass

Description

A Full size, front-facing childseat

B Reduced size (alt. 1), front-facing child seat

B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front-facing child seat

C Full size, rear-facing childseat

D Reduced size, rear-facingchild seat

E Rear-facing infant seat

Sizeclass

Description

F Transverse infant seat, left-hand

G Transverse infant seat, right-hand

WARNING

Never place a child in the passenger seat ifthe car is equipped with an activated airbag.

NOTE

If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classifi-cation then the car model must be includedon the child seat's vehicle list.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you contact anauthorised Volvo dealer for recommenda-tions about which ISOFIX child seats Volvorecommends.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

38

Types of ISOFIX child seat

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Infant seat transverse max. 10 kg F X X

G X X

Infant seat, rear-facing max. 10 kg E X OK

(IL)

Infant seat, rear-facing max. 13 kg E X OK

(IL)

D X OKA

(IL)

C X OKA

(IL)

Child seat, rear-facing 9-18 kg D X OKA

(IL)

C X OKA

(IL)

01 Safety

Child safety 01

��

39

Type of child seat Weight Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats

Front seat Outer rear seat

Front-facing child seat 9-18 kg B X OKB

(IUF)

B1 X OKB

(IUF)

A X OKB

(IUF)

X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.

IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.

IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.

A In order to be able to fit the infant/child seat in the rear seat, the front passenger seat has been adjusted to a location in front of centre position.B Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

40

Upper mounting points for child seats

G026316

Location, upper attachment points.

The car is equipped with upper mountingpoints for child seats. These mounting pointsare located on the rear side of the rear seat.

The upper mounting points are primarilyintended for use with front-facing child seats.Volvo recommends that small children shouldsit in rear-facing child seats to as late an ageas possible.

The child seat's straps must be routedbetween the head restraint and the backrest.

NOTE

For cars with folding head restraints on theoutside seats the head restraints should befolded to facilitate the installation of thistype of child seat.

NOTE

For cars equipped with a cargo area coverover the cargo area, this must be removedbefore a child seat can be fitted in themounting points.

For detailed information on how to secure thechild seat in the upper mounting points, referto the instructions from the child seat manu-facturer.

WARNING

The child seat's straps must always bedrawn through the hole in the head restraintleg before they are tensioned at the attach-ment point.

01 Safety

01

41


Overview, left-hand drive cars................................................................ 44Overview, right-hand drive cars.............................................................. 46Driver's door control panel..................................................................... 48Combined instrument panel.................................................................... 49Indicator and warning symbols............................................................... 50Information display.................................................................................. 54Electrical socket...................................................................................... 56Lighting panel.......................................................................................... 58Left-hand stalk switch............................................................................. 62Right-hand stalk switch.......................................................................... 65Cruise control*........................................................................................ 68Keypad in the steering wheel*................................................................ 70Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers............................. 71Parking brake.......................................................................................... 72Power windows....................................................................................... 73Windows, rearview and door mirrors...................................................... 75Power sunroof* ...................................................................................... 79Personal preferences.............................................................................. 81

HomeLink *............................................................................................ 84

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS


Overview, left-hand drive cars

02

44


Overview, left-hand drive cars

02

45

Steering wheel adjustment

Bonnet release

Control panel

Direction indicators, main beam, trip com-puter

Lighting, fuel filler flap opener

Door handle, lock button.

Air vents in dashboard

Air vent for side window

Cruise control

Horn, airbag

Combined instrument panel

Keypad for infotainment system

Windscreen wipers and washer, headlampwashers

Ignition switch

Sunroof controls

No function

No function

Switch for interior lighting

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Reading lamp, right-hand side

Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air-bag indicator

Interior rearview mirror

Display for climate control and infotain-ment system

Infotainment system

Controls for climate control, infotainmentsystem and personal preferences

Climate control

Gear lever

Hazard warning flashers

Door handle

Glovebox

Parking brake

Electrical socket/cigarette lighter

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS

Switch, optional equipment


Overview, right-hand drive cars

02

46


Overview, right-hand drive cars

02

47

Electrical socket, cigarette lighter

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS

Switch, optional equipment

Parking brake

Control panel

Glovebox

Door handle

Air vent for side window

Air vents in dashboard

Gear lever

Climate control

Controls for climate control, infotainmentsystem and personal preferences

Infotainment system

Display for climate control and infotain-ment system


Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air-bag indicator

Switch for interior lighting

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Reading lamp, right-hand side

No function

No function

Sunroof controls

Ignition switch

Windscreen wipers and washers, head-lamp washers

Cruise control


Horn, airbag

Keypad for infotainment system


Door handle, lock button

Lighting, fuel filler flap opener

Direction indicators, main beam, trip com-puter

Bonnet release



Driver's door control panel

02

48

Driver's door control panel

Power windows

Door mirror, left-hand side

Door mirrors, setting

Door mirror, right-hand side



02

49

G02

9046

Speedometer.

Direction indicators, left.

Warning symbol.

Information display – Shows information orwarning messages, outside temperatureand clock. When the outside temperatureis between +2 °C to -5 °C a snowflake illu-minates on the display. This warns of icyroads. The outside temperature gaugemay show a slightly high reading after thecar has been stationary.

Information symbol.

Direction indicator, right.

Tachometer – Indicates engine speed inthousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Indicator and warning symbols.

Fuel gauge, see also trip computer, page 63.

Main beam indicator.

Display – Display for automatic gear posi-tion, rain sensor, odometer, trip meter andcruise control.

Also shows gear shift indicator (GSI) andgear positions in the D2 and DRIVe model,see page 157.

Button for trip meter – Used to measureshort distances. Short presses on the but-ton switches between the two trip metersT1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 sec-onds) resets an active trip meter to zero.

Temperature gauge - Used for the enginecooling system. A message will appear onthe display if the temperature becomes toohigh and the gauge goes into the red zone.Bear in mind that extra lights placed in frontof the air intake, for example, reduce thecooling capacity at high outside tempera-tures and high engine loads.

Indicator and warning symbols.


Indicator and warning symbols

02

50

Functionality check, symbols

All indicator and warning symbols1 illuminatewhen the remote control key is turned to posi-tion II before starting. This is to check that thesymbols are working. When the engine starts,all the symbols should go out except the park-ing brake symbol, which only goes out whenthe brake is disengaged.

If the engine does not start withinfive seconds, all symbols extin-guish except the symbols for afault in the car's emissions systemand for low oil pressure. Certainsymbols may have no function,depending on the car's specifica-tions.

Symbols in the centre of the instrumentpanel

G030755

The red warning symbol illumi-nates when a fault has been indi-cated which could affect the safetyand/or driveability of the car. Anexplanatory text is shown on the

information display at the same time. The sym-bol remains visible until the fault has been rec-tified but the text message can be cleared withthe READ button, see page 54. The warningsymbol can also illuminate in conjunction withother symbols.

When the symbol illuminates:

1. Stop in a safe manner. Do not drive the carfurther.

2. Read the information on the informationdisplay. Implement the action in accord-ance with the message in the display. Clearthe message using READ.

The yellow information symbol illu-minates and a text appears on theinformation display. The messagetext is cleared using the READ but-ton, see page 54, or disappears

automatically after a period of time (timedepending on which function is indicated).

The yellow information symbol can also illumi-nate in conjunction with other symbols.

NOTE

When a service message is shown, the sym-bol and message are cleared using theREAD button, or disappear automaticallyafter a time.

1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 54.



02

��


Indicator symbols – left-hand side

G029048

Fault in car's emissions system

ABS fault

Rear fog lamp

Stability system DSTC

No function

Engine preheater (diesel)

Low level in fuel tank

Emissions system

If the symbol illuminates then itmay be due to a fault in the car'semissions system. Volvo recom-mends that you seek assistancefrom an authorised Volvo work-

shop for inspection.

ABS fault

If this symbol illuminates then thesystem is not working. The car'sregular brake system continues towork, but without the ABS func-tion.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off theengine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. Drive to a workshop to have the ABS sys-tem checked if the symbol remains lit.Volvo recommends that you seek assis-tance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Rear fog lamp

This symbol is lit when the rear foglamp is on.

Stability system DSTC*

For information on the system'sfunctions and symbols, seepage 169.

Engine preheater (diesel)

This symbol illuminates duringengine preheating. Preheatingoccurs when the temperature isbelow -2 °C. The car can be startedonce the symbol goes out.

Low level in fuel tank

When the symbol illuminates thelevel in the fuel tank is low, refuelas soon as possible.



02

52

Indicator symbols – right-hand side

G029049

Indicator symbol for trailer

Parking brake applied

Airbags – SRS

Low oil pressure

Seatbelt reminder

Alternator not charging

Fault in brake system

Indicator symbol for trailer

This symbol flashes when thedirection indicators are used andthe trailer is connected. If the sym-bol does not flash then one of thelamps on the trailer or the car is

faulty.

Parking brake applied

The symbol illuminates when theparking brake is applied. Alwayspull the parking brake lever to theend position.

NOTE

The symbol illuminates irrespective of howhard the parking brake is applied.

Airbags – SRS

If this symbol remains illuminatedor illuminates while driving, itmeans a fault has been detected inthe seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS orIC system. Volvo recommends that

drive directly to an authorised Volvo workshopfor inspection.

Low oil pressure2

If this symbol illuminates duringdriving then the engine's oil pres-sure is too low. Stop the engineimmediately and check the engineoil level, top up if necessary. If the

symbol illuminates and the oil level is normalVolvo recommends that you contact an author-ised Volvo workshop.

Seatbelt reminder

This symbol illuminates if someonein a front seat has not put on theirseatbelt or if someone in a rearseat has taken off their seatbelt.

Alternator not charging

If this symbol illuminates whiledriving, a fault has occurred in theelectrical system. Volvo recom-mends that you visit an authorisedVolvo workshop.

Fault in brake system

If this symbol illuminates, the brakefluid level may be too low.

2 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 54.



02

53

– Stop the car in a safe place and check thelevel in the brake fluid reservoir, seepage 226. If the reservoir level is belowMIN then the car should not be driven fur-ther. Volvo recommends that the car istransported to an authorised Volvo work-shop to have the brake system checked.

If the BRAKE and ABS symbolsilluminate at the same time, theremay be a fault in the brake forcedistribution system.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off theengine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If both symbols extinguish, continue driv-ing.

4. If the symbols remain illuminated, checkthe level in the brake fluid reservoir, seepage 226.

5. If the brake fluid level is normal but thesymbols are still illuminated, the car can bedriven, with great care, to a workshop to

have the brake system checked. Volvo rec-ommends that you seek assistance froman authorised Volvo workshop.

6. If the level in the reservoir is below MIN

then the car should not be driven any fur-ther. Have the car transported to a work-shop to have the brake system checked.Volvo recommends that you seek assis-tance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at thesame time, there is a risk that the rear endwill skid during heavy braking.

Reminder – doors not closed

If one of the doors, the bonnet3 or the tailgateis not properly closed, the driver will bereminded of this.

Low speed

If the car moves at a speed lessthan 5 km/h, the information sym-bol illuminates and DRIVER

DOOR OPEN, PASSENGER

DOOR OPEN or BONNET OPEN

is shown on the display. Stop the car safely assoon as possible and close the door or bonnet.

High speed

If the car is moving faster than10 km/h, the symbol illuminatesand one of the texts indicated inthe preceding paragraph appearson the display.

Tailgate reminder

If the tailgate is open, this informa-tion symbol will illuminate andTAILGATE OPEN will appear onthe display.

3 Only cars with alarm.


Information display

02

54

Messages

G029050

When a warning or indicator symbol illuminatesthe information display shows a supplemen-tary message.

– Press the READ button (1).

Switch between messages with the READ but-ton. Fault messages are stored in the memoryuntil the fault is rectified.

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you areusing the trip computer, the message mustbe read (press READ) before the previousactivity can be resumed.

Message Specification

STOP SAFELYA Stop the car in a safemanner and turn offthe engine. Seriousrisk of damage.

SERVICE

URGENTAVolvo recommendsthat an authorisedVolvo workshopchecks the carimmediately.

SEE MANUALA Read the Owner'sManual.

SERVICE

REQUIREDAVolvo recommendsthat an authorisedVolvo workshopchecks the car assoon as possible.

HIGH ENGINE

TEMP STOP

ENGINE

Stop the car in a safemanner and turn offthe engine. Seriousrisk of damage.

BOOK TIME FOR

SERVICE

Time to book regularservice. Volvo rec-ommends that anauthorised Volvoworkshop carriesout the service.


TIME FOR REGU-

LAR SERVICE

Time for regularservice. Volvo rec-ommends that anauthorised Volvoworkshop carriesout the service. Thetiming is determinedby the number of kil-ometres driven,number of monthssince the last serv-ice, engine runningtime and oil grade.

SERVICE OVER-

DUE

If the service inter-vals are not followedthen the warrantydoes not cover anydamaged parts.Volvo recommendsthat an authorisedVolvo workshop car-ries out the service.

TRANSMISSION

OIL CHANGE NEE-

DED

Volvo recommendsthat an authorisedVolvo workshopchecks the car assoon as possible.


Information display

02

55


REMINDER

CHECK OIL LEVEL

Check the oil level.The message isshown every 10000 km (certainengine variants). Forinformation onchecking the oillevel, see page 222.

SOOT FILTER

FULL SEE OWNER

MANUAL

Diesel particle filterrequires regenera-tion, see page 146.

DSTC SPIN CON-

TROL OFF

The function of thestability and tractioncontrol system isreduced, seepage 170 for morevariants.


TRANSMISSION

PERFORMANCE

LOW

The gearbox cannothandle full capacity.Drive carefully untilthe message clears,see page 161.

If shown repeatedlythen Volvo recom-mends that anauthorised Volvoworkshop is contac-ted.


TRANSMISSION

OIL TEMP HIGH

Drive more smoothlyor stop the car in asafe manner. Disen-gage the gear andrun the engine atidling speed until themessage clears. Formore information,see page 161.

TRANSM OIL

TEMP STOP

SAFELY

Critical fault. Stopthe car immediatelyin a safe manner.Volvo recommendsthat an authorisedVolvo workshop iscontacted.B

A Part of message, shown together with information on wherethe problem has arisen.

B For more messages concerning automatic transmission, seepage 161.


Electrical socket

02


12 V electrical socket

G019621

Electrical socket and cigarette lighter.

The electrical socket can be used for variousaccessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV screens,music players and mobile phones. For thesocket to supply current, the remote controlkey must be in at least position I, seepage 152.

IMPORTANT

Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket isused at a time. If both sockets are usedsimultaneously, 7.5 A (90 W) per socket isapplicable.

WARNING

Always leave the plug in the socket whenthe socket is not in use.

NOTE

Optional equipment and accessories - e.g.TV screens, music players and mobilephones - which are connected to one of thepassenger compartment's 12V electricalsockets, could be activated by the climatecontrol system, even when the remote con-trol key has been removed or when the caris locked, for example, when the parkingheater is activated at a preset time.

For this reason remove the plugs from theelectrical sockets for optional equipment oraccessories when not in use because thebattery could be drained in the event of suchan occurrence!

Cigarette lighter*

Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pullout the lighter and light a cigarette on theheated coils.

Electrical socket in the rear seat

G029082

Electrical socket in the rear seat.

The electrical socket in the rear seat can beused for various accessories, see "12 V elec-trical socket" above.

NOTE

Cigarette lighter does not work in thissocket.

The electrical socket is designed for 12 V. Forthe socket to supply current, the remote con-trol key must be in at least position I, seepage 152.


Electrical socket

02

57

WARNING

Always leave the plug in the socket whenthe socket is not in use.


Lighting panel

02


General

G020139

Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling

Light switches

Thumbwheel for adjusting display andinstrument lighting

Front fog lamps*

Opening the fuel filler flap

Rear fog lamp

Posi-tion

Specification

Automatic/deactivated dippedbeam. Only main beam flash.

Position/parking lamps

Automatic dipped beam. Mainbeam and main beam flashwork in this position.

Headlamp levelling

The load in the car changes the vertical align-ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz-zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjustingthe height of the beam.

1. Turn the remote control key to position II.

2. Turn the headlamp control (2) to one of theend positions.

3. Roll the control (1) up or down respectivelyto raise or lower beam alignment.

Cars with active Xenon headlamps - ABL* haveautomatic headlamp levelling, so there is nocontrol (1).


Position/parking lamps can be switched onirrespective of remote control key position.

– Turn the headlamp control (2) to the centreposition.

When the remote control key is in position II theposition/parking lamps and number plate light-ing are always on.

Headlamps

Automatic dipped beam*

Dipped beam comes on automatically whenthe remote control key is turned to position II,except when the headlamp control (2) is in thecentre position. If necessary, the automaticdipped beam can be deactivated. Volvo rec-ommends that this is performed by an author-ised Volvo workshop.

Automatic dipped beam, main beam

1. Turn the remote control key to position II.

2. Dipped beam is activated by means ofturning the headlamp control (2) clockwiseto the end position.

3. Main beam is activated by means of mov-ing the left-hand stalk switch towards thesteering wheel to the end position andreleasing it, see page 62.


Lighting panel

02


The lamps are switched off automatically whenthe remote control key is turned to position I or0.

Instrument lighting

The instrument lighting is switched on whenthe remote control key is in position II and theheadlamp control (2) is in one of the end posi-tions. The lighting is automatically dimmedduring the day and can be controlled manuallyat night.

– Roll the control up or down (3) for brighteror dimmer lighting.

Enhanced display lighting

To facilitate reading the odometer, trip meter,clock and outside temperature gauge, theseilluminate when the car is unlocked and whenthe remote control key is removed from theignition switch. The displays extinguish whenthe car is locked.

Fog lamps

NOTE

Regulations for use of fog lamps vary fromcountry to country.

Front fog lamps*

The front fog lamps can be switched on alongwith the headlamps or the position lamps/park-ing lamps.

– Press the button (4).

The light in the button (4) illuminates when thefront fog lamps are switched on.

Rear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp can only be switched on withthe headlamps or the front fog lamps.

– Press the button (6).

The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the com-bined instrument panel and the light in the but-ton (6) illuminate when the rear fog lamp isswitched on.

Fuel filler flap

Press button (5) to open the fuel filler flap whenthe car is unlocked, see page 134.

Active Xenon headlamps*

G026507

Lighting panel, for active Xenon headlamps

If the car is equipped with active Xenon head-lamps (Active Bending Lights, ABL) the lightfrom the headlamps follows the steering wheelmovement in order to provide maximum light-ing in bends and junctions and so provideincreased safety.

The LED illuminates when the functionis activated. The LED flashes and an error mes-sage is shown on the information display in the


Lighting panel

02


event of a malfunction. The function is onlyactive in twilight or darkness and only when thecar is moving.

The function can be deactivated/activated withthe headlamp control.

G020789

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)and activated (right) respectively.

Daytime running lights - DRL*

To save fuel, daytime running lights (DaytimeRunning Light) can be selected during the dayinstead of the more energy-intensive dippedbeam. The daytime running lights mounted inthe spoiler use bright, low-energy diode tech-nology.

Position A automatically gives DRL daytime run-ning lights during the day.

Posi-tion

Specification

Daytime running lights

Daytime running lights when thecar is being driven. Automaticswitching to parking lights whenthe car is parked.

Headlamps and position lamps

Daytime running lights duringdaytime driving. Automaticswitching to headlamps andposition lamps in poor light con-ditions and when windscreenwipers or rear fog lamps areactivated.

If the car is equipped with activeXenon headlamps (ActiveBending Lights, ABL) then thisfunction is also activated.

With the light switch in position A, the daytimerunning lights are activated automatically dur-ing the day. This is regulated by a light sensorwhich switches from daytime running lights todipped beam off the main headlamps at duskor when the daylight becomes too weak.


Lighting panel

02

61

NOTE

To achieve minimal energy consumption,the rear lights are also switched off whenswitching automatically from dipped beamto DRLs.

WARNING

This system help to save energy - it cannotdetermine in all situations when daylight istoo weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mistand rain.

The driver is always responsible for ensuringthat the car is driven with its lights in a cor-rect state and in accordance with applicabletraffic regulations.

Brake light

The brake light automatically comes on duringbraking. For information on the Emergencybrake lights and automatic hazard warningflashers, see page 168.


Left-hand stalk switch

02

62

Stalk switch positions

34

1

2

1

2

G026380

Direction indicators - short flash sequence

Direction indicators - continuous flashsequence

Main beam flash

Home safe lighting and switching betweenmain and dipped beam.

Direction indicators

Short flash sequence

– Move the stalk switch up or down toposition (1) and release.> The direction indicators flash 3 times

and the stalk switch returns to its origi-nal position.

Continuous flash sequence

– Move the stalk switch up or down toend position (2).> The stalk switch remains in its end posi-

tion and is moved back manually, orautomatically by steering wheel move-ment.

Main beam flash

– Move the stalk switch gently towards thesteering wheel to position (3).> Main beam comes on until the stalk

switch is released.

Main beam flash only works when the remotecontrol key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Switching between main and dippedbeam

– Move the stalk switch to the end position(4) and release.

The remote control key must be in position IIand the headlamp control in end position, seepage 58, for main beam to be switched on.

Home safe lighting

Some of the exterior lighting can be keptswitched on to work as home safe lighting afterthe car has been locked. The standard delay is301 seconds, but can be changed to 60 or 90seconds, see page 82.

1. Remove the remote control key from theignition switch.

2. Move the stalk switch towards the steeringwheel to position (3) and release.

3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

1 Factory settings.



02


Trip computer*

G029052

READ - confirms

Thumbwheel2 – browse between menusand options in the trip computer list.

RESET2 - resets

Controls

To scroll through trip computer informationturn the thumbwheel either up or down insteps. The menus are in an infinite loop.

NOTE

If a warning message interrupts while youare using the trip computer, this messagemust be acknowledged. Acknowledge bypressing the READ button and revert to thetrip computer function.

Functions

The trip computer displays the following infor-mation:

• --- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED

• --.- KM/L INSTANTANEOUS

• --.- L/100 KM AVERAGE

• --- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK

• DSTC ON *, see page 169

• --- MPH ACTUAL SPEED 3

AVERAGE SPEED

Average speed is calculated from the latestreset, which is performed with the RESET but-ton.

INSTANTANEOUS

Current fuel consumption is calculated everysecond. The information on the display isupdated every couple of seconds. When thecar is stationary, "--.-" appears on the display.

During the period for regeneration4 fuel con-sumption may increase, see page 146.

AVERAGE

Average fuel consumption is calculated fromthe latest reset, which is performed with theRESET button.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading ifa fuel-driven heater is used.

KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK

The range to empty is calculated based on theaverage fuel consumption over the last 30 km.No guaranteed range remains when the displayshows "--- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK

". Refuel as soon as possible.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading iffuel consumption is changed due to achange in driving style or if a fuel-drivenheater is used for example.

MPH ACTUAL SPEED3

Current speed is displayed in mph.

2 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.3 Certain markets.4 Only applies to diesel cars with particle filter.



02

64

Resetting

1. Select --- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED or--.- L/100 KM AVERAGE

2. Reset with one press of the RESET button.

3. One long press of the RESET button (atleast 5 seconds) resets both averagespeed and average consumption simulta-neously.


Right-hand stalk switch

02


Windscreen wipers

Windscreen and headlamp washers

Rain sensor - On/Off

Thumbwheel

Rear window wiper and washer

Windscreen wipers off

The windscreen wipers are offwhen the stalk switch is in position0.

Single sweep

Raise the stalk switch to make asingle sweep.

Intermittent wiping

You can adjust and set a suitablespeed for intermittent wiping. Turnthe thumbwheel (C) up for a shorterinterval between sweeps. Turn itdown to increase the delay.

Continuous wiping

The wipers sweep at normalspeed.

The wipers sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers during winter –ensure that the wiper blades are not frozenin and that any snow or ice on the wind-screen (and rear window) is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipersare cleaning the windscreen. The wind-screen must be wet when the windscreenwipers are operating.

Windscreen/headlamp washer

Move the stalk switch toward the steeringwheel to start the windscreen and headlampwashers. The wipers will make several moresweeps once the stalk switch is released.

High-pressure headlamp washing*

High-pressure headlamp washing consumes alarge quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, theheadlamps are washed as follows:

Dipped beam selected with the switch on light-ing panel:

The headlamps are washed the first time thewindscreen is washed. Within the next tenminutes, they are washed every fifth washcycle of the windscreen. In the event of a longerinterval the headlamps are washed each time.

Parking/position lamps selected with theswitch on the lighting panel:

• Active Xenon headlamps are only washedevery fifth wash cycle irrespective of thetime that elapses.

• Halogen headlamps are not washed.

The switch on the lighting panel is in position0:

• Active Xenon headlamps are only washedevery fifth wash cycle irrespective of thetime that elapses.

• Halogen headlamps are not washed.



02


Rear window wiper and washer

0

G021418

Move the stalk switch forward to start rear win-dow washing and wiping. The wiper blademakes several extra sweeps once washing hasfinished. The button at the end of the stalkswitch has three positions:

Intermittent wiping: Depress the top of thebutton.

Neutral position: Function deactivated.

Constant speed: Depress the bottom ofthe button.

NOTE

The rear window wiper is equipped withoverheating protection which means thatthe motor is switched off if it overheats. Therear window wiper works again after a cool-ing period (30 seconds or longer, dependingon the heat in the motor and the outsidetemperature).

Wiper – reversing

Engaging reverse gear while the windscreenwipers are on initiates intermittent rear windowwiping. If the rear window wiper is already onat normal speed, no change is made.

The function for intermittent wiping for reversecan be deactivated. Volvo recommends thatyou contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

Rain sensor*

G029053

The rain sensor automatically activates thewindscreen wipers based on how much waterit detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity ofthe rain sensor can be adjusted using thethumbwheel (C), see page 65.

Turn the thumbwheel upwards for higher sen-sitivity and downwards for lower sensitivity, (anextra sweep is made when the thumbwheel isturned upwards).

On/Off

When activating the rain sensor, the remotecontrol key must be in position I or II and thewindscreen wiper stalk switch must be in posi-tion 0 (not activated).



02

67

Activating the rain sensor:

– Press the button (B), see page 65. A displaysymbol shows that the rain sensor isactive.

To turn the rain sensor off, either:

1. Press button (B)

2. Press the stalk switch downward toanother wiper program. If the stalk switchis raised, the rain sensor will remain active,the wipers make an extra sweep and thenreturn to rain sensor mode when the stalkis released to position 0 (not activated), seepage 65.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivatedwhen the remote control key is removed fromthe ignition switch or five minutes after the igni-tion is switched off.

IMPORTANT

At an automatic car wash: Deactivate therain sensor by pressing the button (B) whilethe remote control key is in position I or II.Otherwise, the windscreen wipers couldstart swiping and become damaged.

Thumbwheel

Use the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency ofwiper sweeps when intermittent wiping is

selected, or the sensitivity to rain when the rainsensor is selected.


Cruise control*

02


Activating

G020141

The controls for cruise control are to the left ofthe steering wheel.

Setting the desired speed:

1. Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE isshown on the combined instrument panel.

2. Touch + or – to lock the vehicle speed.CRUISE-ON appears in the combinedinstrument panel.

Cruise control cannot be engaged at speedsbelow 30 km/h or above 200 km/h.

Increasing or decreasing speed

G029054

– Increase or decrease the speed by press-ing and holding + or –. The speed of the carwhen the button is released is set as thenew speed.

A brief press (less than half a second) on + or– changes the speed by 1 km/h or 1 mph1.

NOTE

A temporary increase in speed (less thanone minute) using the accelerator, such aswhile overtaking, does not affect the cruisecontrol setting. When you release the accel-erator, the car will return to the programmedspeed.

Temporary disengagement

– Press 0 to disengage the cruise controltemporarily. CRUISE will be shown on thecombined instrument panel. The speed setearlier is stored in the memory.

The cruise control is also temporarily disen-gaged when:

• the brake pedal or clutch pedal isdepressed

• speed falls below 25-30 km/h1 when trav-elling uphill

• the gear selector is moved to position N

• wheel spin or wheel lock-up occurs

• a temporary increase in speed lasts longerthan one minute.

1 Depending on engine type.


Cruise control*

02


Return to the set speed

– Press this button to resume thepreviously set speed. CRUISE

ON appears on the combinedinstrument panel.

Disengaging

– Press CRUISE to disengage the cruisecontrol. CRUISE ON clears on the com-bined instrument panel.


Keypad in the steering wheel*

02


Button functions

The keypad is available in two versions dependingon the equipment in the car.

The four buttons at the bottom of the steeringwheel keypad control the radio and the phone.The function of a button depends on whichsystem is active. The steering wheel keypadcan be used to scroll between preset stations,change CD tracks and adjust the volume.

– Press and hold one of the arrow keys tofast forward/reverse or search for the nextstation.

The phone must be active to make settings inthe phone system. Activate the phone functionwith the PHONE button in the centre console

in order to enable control of the phone systemwith the arrow keys.

To return to Audio only, press EXIT.. To returnto the phone menu, press EXIT once again.

With the ENTER button you can select, acti-vate and deactivate options in menus. The but-ton can also be used to access the folder struc-ture and start the playback of audio files if adisc with audio files is inserted in the CD player/CD changer*. For more information, seepage 262.


Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers

02

71


G020143

The steering wheel can be adjusted for bothheight and reach.

1. Pull the lever towards you to release thesteering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the positionthat suits you best.

3. Push back the lever to fix the steeringwheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press thesteering wheel lightly at the same time asyou push the lever back.

WARNING

Adjust the steering wheel before driving off,never while driving. Before driving, checkthat the steering wheel is fixed in position.


G020144

Use the hazard warning flashers (all directionindicators flash) when the car is stopped whereit could be a traffic hazard or obstruction. Pressthe button to activate the function.

A sufficiently violent collision or heavy brakingactivates the hazard warning flashers automat-ically, see page 168. The function can bedeactivated with the button.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the use of hazardwarning flashers vary from country to coun-try.


Parking brake

02

72

General

Instrument panel warning symbol and warninglabel for risk of crushing.

The lever is located between the front seats.

WARNING

Make sure that children, other passengersor objects are not in danger of becomingtrapped in any way when the parking brakeis applied or released by the driver.

Applying the parking brake

1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

2. Pull the lever firmly.

> The instrument panel's warning symbolis illuminated.

NOTE

The warning lamp symbol in the combinedinstrument panel illuminates irrespective ofhow hard the parking brake is applied.

3. Release the foot brake pedal and makesure that the car is at a standstill position.

4. If the vehicle moves then the parking brakelever must be pulled up a little bit further.

• When parking the vehicle, always engage1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put thegear selector in position P (for automaticgearbox).

Parking on a hill

If the car is parked facing uphill:

• Turn the wheels away from the kerb.

If the car is parked facing downhill:

• Turn the wheels towards the kerb.

WARNING

Get into the habit of always applying theparking brake when parking on a slope -leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has auto-matic transmission, is not sufficient to holdthe car in all situation.

Disengaging the parking brake

1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

2. Pull the parking brake lever up slightly,press the button, lower the parking brakelever and release the button.> The instrument panel's warning symbol

is switched off.


Power windows

02

73

Operation

The power windows are operated using thecontrols in the doors. The key position must beI or II for the power windows to operate.

The windows continue to work for a limitedamount of time when the car is stopped andafter the remote control key is removed, provi-ded none of the doors is opened. Operate thewindows with caution.

To open a window:

– Depress the front of the control.

To close a window:

– Raise the front of the control.

Remote control and lock buttons

To operate the power windows with lock but-tons and remote control, see pages 126 and134.

WARNING

Make sure that children and other passen-gers cannot be trapped in any way whenclosing the windows. Pay close attention ifthe windows are closed with the remotecontrol.

Driver's door

Controls, power windows front

The driver can operate both of the power win-dows from the driver's seat.

The windows can be opened and closed in twoways:

Manual operation

Depress one of the controls (1) gently or raiseit gently. The power window opens or closesas long as the switch is actuated.

Automatic operation

Fully depress one of the controls (1) or raise it,then release. The side window will then openor close automatically. If the window is

obstructed by an object, the movement willstop.

WARNING

The function that interrupts the movementof the windows in the event of them beingblocked works with both automatic andmanual closing, although not with pinchprotection deployed.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Remember to switch off the supply to thepower windows by removing the remotecontrol key if the driver leaves the car.

Make sure that children and other passen-gers cannot be trapped in any way whenclosing the windows.


Power windows

02

74

Passenger seat

Passenger seat.

The control in the front passenger door oper-ates that window only.


Windows, rearview and door mirrors

02

��



Bright light from behind could be reflected inthe rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Usedimming when disturbed by light from behind.

Dipping

Control for dimming

Normal position

Dimmed position.

Automatic dimming*

Bright light from behind is automaticallydimmed by the rearview mirror. The control (1)is not available in mirrors with automatic dim-ming.

Interior rearview mirror with compass*

G031043

The upper right-hand corner of the rearviewmirror has an integrated display that shows thecompass direction in which the front of the caris pointing. Eight different directions are shownwith English abbreviations: N (north), NE (northeast), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW

(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).

Calibrating the compass

G031045

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.The compass is set for the geographical areato which the car was delivered. The compassshould be calibrated if the car is moved acrossseveral magnetic zones.

1. Stop the car in a wide open area with theengine running at idling speed.

2. Press and hold button (1) for at least 6 sec-onds. Following which, the character C isshown (the button is concealed so use apaper clip for example to press it in).

3. Press and hold button (1) for at least 3 sec-onds. The number for the current magneticzone is displayed.



02

76

4. Press the button (1) repeatedly until thenumber for the required magnetic zone (1–

15) is shown, refer to the map of magneticzones for the compass.

5. Wait until the display returns to showingthe character C.

6. Following which, press and hold the buttonin for 9 seconds and select L for left-handdrive cars and R for right-hand drive.

7. Drive slowly in a circle with a maximumspeed of 10 km/h until a compass directionis shown on the display, which indicatesthat the calibration is complete.

G020150

Magnetic zones, Europe.

G020151

Magnetic zones, Asia.

G020152

Magnetic zones, South America.

G020153

Magnetic zones, Australia.

G020154

Magnetic zones, Africa.



02


Door mirrors

The controls for adjusting the two door mirrorsare at the front of the driver's door armrest. Therearview mirrors can be operated in key posi-tion I and II.

1. Press the L button for the left-hand doormirror or the R button for the right-handdoor mirror. The light on the button illumi-nates.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in thecentre.

3. Press the L or R button again. The lightgoes out.

Retractable power door mirrors*

The mirrors can be retracted for parking/drivingin narrow spaces. This can be carried out in keyposition I and II.

Retracting the mirrors

1. Press the L and R button at the same time.

2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automat-ically stop in the fully retracted position.

WARNING

The door mirror on the driver's side is thewide-angled type to provide optimal vision.Objects may appear further away than theyactually are.

Folding out the mirrors

1. Press the L and R button at the same time.

2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automat-ically stop in the fully extended position.

Automatic retracting/extending

When the car is locked/unlocked with theremote control or using the Keyless-system,see page 130, the door mirrors are automati-cally retracted/extended.

NOTE

The door mirrors will not be extended auto-matically during unlocking if they wereretracted using the controls in the door.

If the car is locked with the remote controland is then started, the door mirrors will stillbe extended.

The function can be activated/deactivatedunder Car settings… Mirror fold on

locking, see page 82 for a description of themenu system.

Resetting to neutral

Mirrors that have been moved out of positionby an external force must be reset to the neutralposition for electric retracting and extending towork.

1. Use the L and R buttons to retract the mir-rors.

2. Extend the mirrors again with the L and Rbutton. The mirrors are now reset to theneutral.

Home safe and approach lighting

The light* on the door mirrors illuminates whenthe approach lighting or home safe lighting isactivated.



02


Blind Spot Information System, BLIS*

BLIS is an information system that under cer-tain conditions can help to draw the driver'sattention to vehicles moving in the same direc-tion in the so-called "blind spot", seepage 173.


Power sunroof*

02


Open positions

G007503

The sunroof controls are located in the roofpanel. The sunroof can be opened in two posi-tions:

Ventilation position, up at the rear edge

Sliding position, backwards/forwards

The remote control key must be in position I orII.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Switch off the supply to the power sunroofby removing the remote control key if thedriver leaves the car.

G029222

Opening, automatic

Opening, manual

Closing, manual

Closing, automatic

Opening, ventilation position

Closing, ventilation position

Ventilation position

Open:

– Press the rear edge of the control (5)upward.

Close:

– Pull the rear edge of the control (6) down-ward.

From ventilation position to fully open sunroof:

– Pull the control rearward to the end posi-tion (1) and release.

Sliding position

Automatic operation

– Pull the control past the point of resistance(2) to the rear end position (1) or past thepoint of resistance (3) to the forward endposition (4) and release. The sunroofopens/closes completely.

Manual operation

Open:

– Pull the control rearward to the point ofresistance (2). The sunroof moves to maxi-mum open position as long as the buttonis kept depressed.

Close:

– Press the control forward to the point ofresistance (3). The sunroof moves to


Power sunroof*

02


closed position as long as the button iskept depressed.

WARNING

The sunroof's pinch-protection functiononly operates during automatic closing, notmanual closing.

Closing with remote control or lockbutton

G020157

– One long press on the lock button closesthe sunroof and all the windows. The doorsand the tailgate are locked.

If you need to interrupt closing:

– Press the lock button again.

WARNING

Make sure that children or other passengersare not in danger of becoming trapped inany way when closing the sunroof with theremote control. Always operate the sunroofwith caution.

Sunscreen

The sunroof features a manual, sliding interiorsunscreen. The sunscreen slides back auto-matically when the sunroof is opened. Grip thehandle and slide the screen forward to close it.

Pinch protection

The sunroof's pinch protection function is acti-vated if the hatch is blocked by an object. Ifblocked, the sunroof will stop and automati-cally open to the previous position.

WARNING

The sunroof's pinch protection function onlyoperates during automatic closing, not dur-ing manual closing.

Make sure that nobody is in danger ofbecoming trapped in any way when closingthe sunroof.

Wind deflector

The sunroof has a wind deflector that is foldedup when the sunroof is in the open position.


Personal preferences

02

81

Possible settings

Personal preferences can be set for some ofthe car's functions. This applies to locks, cli-mate control and audio functions. For audiofunctions, see page 252.

Control panel

Control panel.

Display

MENU

EXIT

ENTER

Navigation

Use

The settings are shown on the display (A).

Open the menu to enter settings:

1. Press MENU (B).

2. Scroll, for example, to Car settings… withthe navigation button (E).

3. Press ENTER (D).

4. Select an alternative with the navigationbutton (E).

5. Press ENTER to activate the selection.

Activated function is shown in the displaywith . Deactivated function is shown inthe display with .

Close the menu:

– Press EXIT (C) for approximately one sec-ond.

Clock, adjustment

The hour and minute are each adjusted sepa-rately.

1. Use the numbers on the keypad or "arrowup" or "arrow down" on the navigation but-ton (E).

2. Select the number for adjustment using"arrow right" or "arrow left" on the naviga-tion button.

3. Press ENTER to start the clock.

NOTE

If the car has a 12-hour clock then AM/PMis selected using "arrow up" or "arrowdown" after the final minute number hasbeen adjusted.

Climate settings

Automatic blower adjust

The fan speed can be set to AUTO mode incars equipped with ECC:

– Select from Low, Normal and High.

Recirculation timer

When the timer is active, the air recirculates for3-12 minutes, depending on the outside airtemperature.



02


– Select On/Off depending on whether or notyou wish the recirculation timer to beactive.

Reset all

Resets the climate function options to the fac-tory settings.

Car settings

Retract mirrors when locking*

When the car is locked/unlocked with theremote control the door mirrors can be retrac-ted/extended automatically. The On/Off optionis available.

Reduced guard*

The deadlocks function can be temporarilydeactivated and the alarm level reduced ifsomeone wishes to remain in the car and thedoors have to be locked from the outside. TheActivate once and Ask on exit options areavailable, see pages 135 and 138.

Unlock confirm. light

The hazard warning flashers can provide feed-back when the car is unlocked with the remotecontrol. The On/Off option is available.

Lock confirm. light

The hazard warning flashers can provide feed-back when the car is locked with the remotecontrol. The On/Off option is available.

Doors – auto lock

When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h thedoors and tailgate can be locked automatically.The On/Off option is available.

Doors unlock

There are two alternatives for unlocking:

• All doors – one press of the remote controlunlocks both doors and the tailgate.

• Driver door, then all – one press of theremote control unlocks the driver's door. Asecond press then unlocks the passengerdoor and the tailgate.

Keyless entry

• All doors - both doors and the tailgate areunlocked simultaneously1.

• Any door – any door or the tailgate can beunlocked separately.

Simultaneous closing/opening of all

windows

This function can be selected for the lock but-ton on the remote control and the front doors'central locking button, as well as the outside

door handle button on cars with the keylesssystem:

• Auto. close all windows - all windowsand the sunroof are closed simultaneouslywith one long press on the lock button.

This function can be selected for the unlockbutton on the remote control and the frontdoors' central locking button:

• Auto. open all windows – all windows areopened simultaneously with one longpress on the unlock button.

Approach lighting

Select the time the car's lights should remainswitched on when the approach lighting buttonis pressed - see page 126.

The following alternatives are available:

• 30 seconds

• 60 seconds

• 90 seconds

Home safe lighting

Select the time the car's lights should remainon when the left-hand stalk switch is pulledback after the remote control key has beenremoved - see page 62.

The following alternatives are available:

1 Both doors and the tailgate can also be locked simultaneously.



02

83

• 30 seconds

• 60 seconds

• 90 seconds

Information

• VIN number… - (Vehicle IdentificationNumber) is the car's unique identity num-ber.

• Number of keys… - The number of keysregistered for the car is shown.


HomeLink *

02


General

G030070

HomeLink is a programmable remote controlwhich can control up to three different devices(e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light-ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing soreplace their remote controls. HomeLink issupplied built into the left-hand sun visor.

The HomeLink panel consists of three pro-grammable buttons and one indicator lamp.

NOTE

HomeLink is designed not to work if the caris locked from the outside.

Save the original remote controls for futureprogramming (e.g. when switching toanother car).

Delete the button programming when thecar is to be sold.

Metallic sun visors should not be used incars fitted with HomeLink . This may havean adverse effect on its function.

Operation

When HomeLink is fully programmed it can beused in place of the separate original remotecontrols.

Depress the programmed button to activatethe garage door, alarm system etc. The indi-cator lamp illuminates for the time that the but-ton is kept depressed.

NOTE

If the ignition is not activated, HomeLinkwill work for 30 minutes after the driver'sdoor has been opened.

The original remote controls can of course beused in parallel with HomeLink .

WARNING

If HomeLink is used to operate a garagedoor or gate, ensure that nobody is in thevicinity of the door or gate while it is inmotion.

Do not use the HomeLink remote controlfor any garage door that does not havesafety stop and safety reverse. The garagedoor must react immediately when itdetects that something is preventing itsmovement, and stop directly and reverse. Agarage door without these characteristicscould cause personal injury. For furtherinformation - contact the supplier via theInternet: www.homelink.com.

Programming for the first time

The first step erases the memory inHomeLink and must not be carried out whenonly one individual button is being reprogram-med.

1. Depress the two outer buttons and do notrelease until the indicator lamp starts toflash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash-ing indicates that HomeLink is set in"learn mode" and is ready to be pro-grammed.

2. Position the original remote control5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi-cator lamp.


HomeLink *

02

��


The particular distance that is requiredbetween the original remote control andHomeLink depends on the programmingof the device in question. Perhaps severalattempts will be required at different dis-tances. Maintain each position for approx.15 seconds before trying a new one.

3. Depress the button for the original remotecontrol and the button to be programmedon HomeLink simultaneously. Do notrelease the buttons until the indicator lamphas changed over from slow to rapid flash-ing. The rapid flashing indicates successfulprogramming.

4. Test the programming by depressing theprogrammed button on HomeLink andwatching the indicator lamp:

• Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu-minates with a constant glow when thebutton is kept depressed, this indicatesthat the programming is complete. Thegarage door, gate or similar should nowbe activated when the programmedHomeLink button is depressed.

• Glow not constant: The indicator lampflashes quickly for approx. 2 secondsand then changes over to a constantglow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc-

ess is repeated for approx. 20 secondsand indicates that the device has a "roll-ing code". The garage door, gate or sim-ilar is not activated when the pro-grammed HomeLink button isdepressed. Continue the programmingin accordance with the following.

5. Locate the "programming button1" on thereceiver for the garage door for example,normally located close to the antenna'sbracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-culty in finding the button - consult thesupplier's manual, or contact the suppliervia the Internet: www.homelink.com.

6. Depress and release the "programmingbutton". The button flashes forapprox. 30 seconds and the next step mustbe carried out within this period.

7. Depress the programmed button onHomeLink , while the "programming but-ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed forapprox. 3 seconds and then release.Repeat the press/hold/release sequenceup to 3 times to conclude the program-ming.

Programming individual buttons

To reprogram an individual button, proceed inaccordance with the following:

1. Depress the required button onHomeLink and do not release until step 3has been completed.

2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLinkstarts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,position the original remote control5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi-cator lamp.

The particular distance that is requiredbetween the original remote control andHomeLink depends on the programming ofthe device in question. Perhaps severalattempts will be required at different dis-tances. Maintain each position for approx.15 seconds before trying a new one.

3. Depress the button on the original remotecontrol. The indicator lamp will start toflash. When the flashing has changed overfrom a slow to a rapid flashing - releaseboth buttons. The rapid flashing indicatessuccessful programming.

4. Test the programming by depressing theprogrammed button on HomeLink andwatching the indicator lamp:

1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.


HomeLink *

02


• Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu-minates with a constant glow when thebutton is kept depressed, this indicatesthat the programming is complete. Thegarage door, gate or similar should nowbe activated when the programmedHomeLink button is depressed.

• Glow not constant: The indicator lampflashes quickly for approx. 2 secondsand then changes over to a constantglow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc-ess is repeated for approx. 20 secondsand indicates that the device has a "roll-ing code". The garage door, gate or sim-ilar is not activated when the pro-grammed HomeLink button isdepressed. Continue the programmingin accordance with the following.

5. Locate the "programming button2" on thereceiver for the garage door for example,normally located close to the antenna'sbracket on the receiver. If you have diffi-culty in finding the button - consult thesupplier's manual, or contact the suppliervia the Internet: www.homelink.com.

6. Depress and release the "programmingbutton". The button flashes for approx. 30seconds and the next step must be carriedout within this period.

7. Depress the programmed button onHomeLink , while the "programming but-ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed forapprox. 3 seconds and then release.Repeat the press/hold/release sequenceup to 3 times to conclude the program-ming.

Erasing programming

It is only possible to erase the programming forall the buttons on HomeLink , not for individualbuttons.

– Depress the two outer buttons and do notrelease until the indicator lamp starts toflash after approx. 20 seconds.> HomeLink is now set in so-called

"learn mode" and is ready to be pro-grammed once more, see page 84.

2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.


02

87


General information on climate control................................................... 90Manual climate control, AC..................................................................... 92Electronic climate control, ECC*............................................................. 95Air distribution......................................................................................... 98Fuel-driven engine block heaterand passenger compartment heater*..................................................... 99Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)..................................................... 102

CLIMATE CONTROL

03 Climate control

General information on climate control

03

90

Air conditioning

The climate control system cools or heats aswell as dehumidifies the air in the passengercompartment. The car is equipped with eithermanual (AC) or electronic climate control (ECC,Electronic Climate Control).

NOTE

The air conditioning system can beswitched off, but to ensure the best possibleair in the passenger compartment and pre-vent the windows from misting, it shouldalways be on.

Misting windows

Remove misting on the insides of the windowsby first using the defroster function.

To reduce the risk of misting, clean the win-dows with a normal window cleaning agent.

Ice and snow

Remove ice and snow from the climate controlair intake (the grille between the bonnet and thewindscreen).

Fault tracing and repair

Volvo recommends that you only entrust faulttracing and repair of the climate control systemto an authorised Volvo workshop.

Refrigerant

The air conditioning system contains R134arefrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo-rine, which means that it is harmless to theozone layer. The system must only be chargedwith R134a refrigerant, see also page 292.Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvoworkshop carries out this work.

Passenger compartment filter

All air entering the car's passenger compart-ment is only cleaned with one filter. This mustbe replaced at regular intervals. Follow theVolvo Service Programme for the recom-mended replacement intervals. If the car isused in a severely contaminated environment,it may be necessary to replace the filter moreoften.

NOTE

There are different types of passenger com-partment filter. Make sure that the correctfilter is fitted.

Display

There is a display above the climate controlpanel. This displays climate control settings.


You can set preferences for two climate controlfunctions:

• Fan speed in AUTO mode (applies only tocars with ECC).

• Recirculation timer for passenger com-partment air.

For information about these settings, seepage 81.

03 Climate control

General information on climate control

03


Air vents in the dashboard

G019942

Open

Closed

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the outer vents towards the side windowsto remove misting from the front side windows.

During cold weather - Close the centre ventsfor optimum comfort and best demisting.

ECC*

Actual temperature

The temperature you select corresponds to thephysical experience with reference to factorssuch as air speed, humidity and solar radiationin and around the car.

The system includes a sun sensor whichdetects the side from which the sun is shininginto the passenger compartment. This meansthat the temperature can differ between theright and left-hand air vents despite the con-trols being set for the same temperature onboth sides.

Sensor location

• The sun sensor is on the top side of thedashboard.

• The temperature sensor for the passengercompartment is behind the climate controlpanel.

• The outside temperature sensor is locatedon the door mirror.

• The humidity sensor is located in the inte-rior rearview mirror.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors withclothing or other objects.

Side windows and sunroof

To ensure that the air conditioning works sat-isfactorily, close all side windows and the sun-roof (if fitted).

Acceleration

The air conditioning system switches off tem-porarily at full throttle. You may briefly feel atemporary rise in temperature.

Condensation

In warm weather, condensation from the airconditioning may drip under the car. This isnormal.

03 Climate control

Manual climate control, AC

03

92

Control panel

Fan

Recirculation

Defroster

Air distribution

AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off

Heated front left seat

Heated front right seat

Rear window and door mirror defrosters

Temperature

Functions

1. Fan

Increase or decrease the fanspeed by turning the knob.

If the knob is turned anticlock-wise and the fan indicator inthe display goes out, the fanand the air conditioning are

switched off. The display shows the fan symboland OFF.

2. Recirculation

Recirculation can be used toshut out bad air, exhaustfumes, etc. from the passen-ger compartment. The air inthe passenger compartmentis recirculated. No outside airis taken into the car. Recircu-

lation (together with the air conditioning sys-tem) cools the passenger compartment morequickly in hot weather. If the air in the car recir-culates for too long then there is a risk of thewindows misting.

03 Climate control


03

��


Timer

The timer function reduces the risk of icing,misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected).See page 81, for activating/deactivating thefunction. When the Defroster (3) program isselected, recirculation is deactivated.

3. Defroster

Used to quickly remove mist-ing and ice from the wind-screen and side windows. Airflows to the windows at highfan speed. The light in thedefroster button illuminateswhen the function is active.

The following also takes place when thedefroster function is activated in order to pro-vide maximum dehumidification in the passen-ger compartment:

• the air conditioning (AC) is automaticallyswitched on (can be switched off with theAC button (5)

• recirculation is automatically disengaged.

When the defroster is switched off the climatecontrol returns to the previous settings.

4. Air distribution

The airflow can be distributedto the windows, dashboardvents or floor by pressing theair distribution buttons.

A symbol on the displayabove the climate control

panel and an illuminated light in the relevantbutton indicate which function has beenselected.

Refer to the table on page 98.

5. AC – On/Off (ON/OFF)

ON: The air conditioning is on.It is controlled by the system'sAUTO function. This way,incoming air is cooled anddehumidified.

OFF: The air conditioning isoff.

When the defroster function is activated the airconditioning is automatically switched on (canbe switched off with the AC button). An illumi-nated lamp above ON and OFF respectively inthe button shows the function selected.

6. and 7. Heated front seats*

Higher heat:

– Press the button once – both lights illumi-nate.

Lower heat:

– Press the button once – one light illumi-nates.

Heat off:

– Press the button three times – light not illu-minated.

8. Rear window and door mirror

defrosters

Heating is used to quicklyremove misting and ice fromthe rear window and door mir-rors. Press the button once tostart simultaneous rear win-dow and rearview mirrordefrosting. The function is

active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.

The function is switched off manually or auto-matically. Switch off manually with one press

03 Climate control


03


on the button. Automatic switching off discon-nects the rear window and door mirrors after12 – 20 minutes depending on outside tem-perature.

During cold weather the defrosting* also con-tinues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rearwindow and door mirrors free of ice and mist.The intensity of the defrosting can be adaptedto the outside temperature. This function mustbe switched off manually.

9. Temperature

Select cooling or heating forboth driver and passengerside.

03 Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC*

03


Control panel

AUTO

Fan

Recirculation/Air quality system

Defroster

Air distribution

AC ON/OFF – Air conditioning On/Off

Heated front left seat

Heated front right seat

Rear window and door mirror defrosters

Temperature selector

Functions

1. AUTO

The AUTO function automat-ically regulates climate con-trol and maintains theselected temperature. TheAUTO function controls heat-ing, air conditioning, fanspeed, recirculation, and air

distribution.

If you select one or more manual functions, theother functions continue to be controlled auto-matically. All manual settings are switched offwhen AUTO is switched on. The display showsAUTO CLIMATE.

2. Fan

Turn the knob to increase ordecrease fan speed. If AUTO

is selected then fan speed isregulated automatically. Thepreviously set fan speed isdisengaged.

NOTE

If the knob is turned anticlockwise and thefan indicator in the display goes out, the fanand the air conditioning are switched off.The display shows the fan symbol andOFF.

03 Climate control


03


3. Recirculation

The function is selected toshut out bad air, exhaustgases etc. from the passen-ger compartment. The air inthe passenger compartmentis recirculated, i.e. no outsideair is taken into the car when

this function is activated. If the air in the carrecirculates for too long, there is a risk of mist-ing on the insides of the windows.

Timer

The timer function reduces the risk of icing,misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected).To activate/deactivate the function seepage 81.

NOTE

When Defroster (4) is selected, recirculationis always deactivated.

3. Air quality system*

Same button as recirculation.

The air quality system consists of a multi-filterand a sensor. The filter separates gases andparticles to reduce the levels of odours andpollution in the passenger compartment. Whenthe sensor detects polluted outside air, the airintakes are closed and the air in the passengercompartment is recirculated. A green light (A)illuminates in the button when the air qualitysensor is active.

Activating the air quality sensor:

– Press AUTO (1) to activate the air qualitysensor (normal setting).

Or:

– Switch between three functions by press-ing repeatedly the recirculation button.

• Air quality sensor engaged – the light (A)illuminates.

• No recirculation engaged, provided it is notrequired for cooling in hot weather – lightnot illuminated.

• Recirculation engaged – the light (M) illu-minates.

Keep the following in mind:

• As a rule, the air quality sensor shouldalways be engaged.

• Recirculation is limited in cold weather toavoid misting.

• The defroster functions for the front, sideand rear windows can be used to demistthe windows.

4. Defroster

Used to quickly remove mist-ing and ice from the wind-screen and side windows. Airflows to the windows at highfan speed. The light in thedefroster button illuminateswhen the function is active.

The following also takes place when thedefroster function is activated in order to pro-vide maximum dehumidification in the passen-ger compartment:

• the air conditioning (AC) is automaticallyswitched on (can be switched off with theAC button (6)

• recirculation is automatically disengaged.

When the defroster is switched off the climatecontrol returns to the previous settings.

5. Air distribution

The airflow can be distributedto the windows, dashboardvents or floor by pressing theair distribution buttons.

03 Climate control


03


A symbol on the display above the climate con-trol panel and an illuminated light in the relevantbutton indicate which function has beenselected.

Refer to the table on page 98.

6. AC – On/Off (ON/OFF)

ON: The air conditioning is on.It is controlled by the system'sAUTO function. This way,incoming air is cooled anddehumidified.

OFF: Off

When the defroster function is activated the airconditioning is automatically switched on (canbe switched off with the AC button).

NOTE

The climate control system's demistingfunction with humidity sensor is significantlyreduced with the air conditioning in deacti-vated mode (OFF), as well as with manuallyselected air distribution and fan speed.

7 and 8. Heated front seats*

To activate front seat heating:

Higher heat:

– Press the button once – both lights illumi-nate.

Lower heat:

– Press the button once – one light illumi-nates.

Heat off:

– Press the button three times – light not illu-minated.

9. Rear window and door mirror

defrosters

Heating is used to quicklyremove misting and ice fromthe rear window and door mir-rors. Press the button once tostart simultaneous rear win-dow and rearview mirrordefrosting. The function is

active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.

The function is switched off manually or auto-matically. Switch off manually with one press

on the button. Automatic switching off discon-nects the rear window and door mirrors after12 – 20 minutes depending on outside tem-perature.

During cold weather the defrosting* also con-tinues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rearwindow and door mirrors free of ice and mist.The intensity of the defrosting can be adaptedto the outside temperature. This function mustbe switched off manually.

10. Temperature selector

The temperatures on thedriver and passenger sidescan be set independently.

Press the button once to acti-vate one side only. Pressagain to activate the other

side. Press the button a third time to activateboth sides.

The active side is indicated by the button's lightand in the display above the climate controlpanel.

When the car is started, the most recent settingis resumed.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be hastened byselecting a higher or lower temperature thanthe actual desired temperature.

03 Climate control

Air distribution

03

98

Air distribution Use: Air distribution Use:

Air to windows. Some airflows from the air vents. Theair is not recirculated. Airconditioning is alwaysengaged.

to remove ice andmisting quickly.

Air to the floor and windows.Some air flows from the dash-board air vents.

to ensure comfortableconditions and gooddemisting in cold orhumid weather.

Air to windscreen and sidewindows. Some air flowsfrom the air vents.

to prevent mistingand icing in a cold andhumid climate. (Notfor low fan speed.)

Air to floor and from dash-board air vents.

in sunny weather withcool outside tempera-tures.

Airflow to windows and fromdashboard air vents.

to ensure good com-fort in warm, dryweather.

Air to floor. Some air flows tothe dashboard air vents andwindows.

to warm the feet.

Airflow to the head andchest from the dashboardair vents.

to ensure efficientcooling in warmweather.

Airflow to windows, fromdashboard air vents and tothe floor.

to provide cooler air forthe feet or warmer airto the upper body incold weather or hot,dry weather.

03 Climate control

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

03


General information about heaters

The parking heater heats the engine and pas-senger compartment and can be starteddirectly or with the timer.

Two different times can be selected using thetimer. Here, time refers to the time when the caris heated and ready. The car's electronic sys-tem calculates when heating should be startedbased on the outside temperature.

At -10 °C or lower the maximum running timeof the parking heater is 50 minutes.

WARNING

The car must be outdoors when the petrolor diesel heater is used.

NOTE

When the parking heater is active there maybe smoke from underneath the car, which isperfectly normal.

Refuelling

Warning decal on fuel filler flap.

WARNING

Fuel which spills out could be ignited.Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-ting to refuel.

Check on the information display that theparking heater is switched off. When it isrunning, the information display showsPARK HEAT ON.

Parking on a hill

If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front ofthe car should point downhill to ensure thatthere is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.

Battery and fuel

If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuellevel is too low, the parking heater is switchedoff automatically and a message appears onthe information display.

– Acknowledge the message by pressing theindicator stalk READ button once.

IMPORTANT

Repeated use of the parking heater com-bined with short journeys may discharge thebattery and impair starting.

The car should be driven for the same timeas the heater is used to ensure that the car'sbattery is recharged adequately to replacethe energy consumed by the heater when itis used on a regular basis.

03 Climate control


03


Activating the heater

G029052

READ button

Thumbwheel1

RESET button1

Symbols and display messages

When one of the timer's settings orDirect start is activated, the infor-mation symbol in the combinedinstrument panel illuminates andthe information display shows an

explanatory text.

Display Specification

FUEL HEATER ON The heater isswitched on andrunning.

TIMER IS SET FOR

FUEL HEATER

Reminder that theheater will start atthe set time after thecar has been left,when the remotecontrol key isremoved from theignition switch.

Display Specification

HEATER STOP-

PED LOW BAT-

TERY

The heater has beenstopped by the car'selectronics in orderto facilitate startingthe engine.

HEATER STOP-

PED LOW FUEL

LEVEL

The heater has beenstopped by the car'selectronics in orderto facilitate startingthe engine as well as50 km driving.

Direct start and immediate stop

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to DIRECT

START PARK HEAT OFF or DIRECT

START PARK HEAT ON.

2. Long presses on the RESET buttonchange between the two alternatives.

DIRECT START PARK HEAT ON: Parkingheater switched on manually or with pro-grammed timer.

DIRECT START PARK HEAT OFF: Parkingheater switched off.

1 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.

03 Climate control


03


With the direct start of the heater it will be acti-vated for 50 minutes.

Heating of the passenger compartment willbegin as soon as the engine coolant hasreached the correct temperature.

NOTE

The car can be started and driven while theparking heater is running.

Setting the timer

The time when the car shall be used and heatedis specified with the timer.

Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to PARK

HEAT TIMER --:-- ON.

2. Give a long press (approx. 2 seconds) onthe RESET button in order to access theflashing time setting.

3. Select the required hour using the thumb-wheel.

4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash-ing minutes setting.

5. Select the required minute using thethumbwheel.

6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.

7. Press RESET to activate the timer.

After setting TIMER 1 a second start time canbe programmed with TIMER 2 by scrolling withthe thumbwheel.

Set the alternative time in the same way asTIMER 1.

Deactivating a timer-started heater

A timer-started heater can be switched offmanually before the set time has elapsed. Pro-ceed as follows:

1. Press the READ button.

2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the textPARK HEAT TIMER 1 or PARK HEAT

TIMER 2.

The text ON flashes on the display.

3. Press RESET.

The text OFF is shown with a constantglow and the heater is switched OFF.

A timer-started heater can be switched off inaccordance with the instructions in the section"Direct start and immediate stop".

Clock/timer

The heater's time is connected to the car'sclock.

NOTE

All timer programming will be cleared if thecar's clock is reset.

03 Climate control

Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)

03


Auxiliary heater (diesel)

In diesel-engined cars the auxiliary heater maybe required for achieving the correct tempera-ture in the engine and passenger compartmentduring cold weather.

The heater starts automatically when extraheat is required when the engine is running.

The heater is switched off automatically whenthe correct temperature is reached or when theengine is switched off.

NOTE

The auxiliary heater cannot be switched onor off manually but is only controlled by thecar's electronics.

When the auxiliary heater is active there maybe smoke from underneath the car, which isperfectly normal.

03 Climate control

03

103

104

Front seats............................................................................................ 106Interior lighting...................................................................................... 111Storage spaces in the passenger compartment................................... 114Rear seat............................................................................................... 118Cargo area............................................................................................ 120

INTERIOR

04 Interior

Front seats

04


Seating position, manual seat

The driver's and passenger seats can beadjusted to the optimum sitting and drivingpositions.

Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjustthe distance to the steering wheel and ped-als. Check that the seat is locked afterchanging the position setting.

Raise/lower front edge of seat cushion,pump up/down.

Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.

Lumbar support1, turn the wheel.

Backrest rake: turn the wheel.

Control panel for power seat*.

Lever (2) is not available on all seat models.

WARNING

Adjust the position of the driver's seat andadjust the seatbelt, see page 16, before set-ting off, never while driving.

Check that the seat is locked in position.

NOTE

When putting on the seatbelt it is easiest topick it up from down at the seatbelt guide,not over the shoulder.

Seating position, power seat*

G020199

The seats can be adjusted for a certain timeafter unlocking the door with the remote con-trol key without the key being inserted into theignition switch. The seat can always beadjusted in key position I or II.

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Seat, forwards/backwards

Seat, up/down

Backrest rake

1 Also applies to power seat.

04 Interior

Front seats

04

107

An overload protection is deployed if one of theseats is blocked. If this happens, turn off theignition and wait a short time before adjustingthe seat again. Only one of the seat's settingscan be adjusted at a time.

Memory function

G020200

Buttons for memory function.

Store setting

1. Adjust seat.

2. Press and hold button M while pressingbutton 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously.

Using a stored setting

Press one of the memory buttons 1–3 until theseat stops. If you release the button then themovement of the seat will stop.

Emergency stop

If the seat accidentally begins to move, pressone of the setting buttons for the seat or mem-ory buttons in order to stop the seat.

WARNING

Risk of crushing. Make sure that children donot play with the controls.

Check that there are no objects in front of,behind or under the seat during adjustment.

Ensure that none of the rear seat passen-gers is in danger of becoming trapped.

Memory in remote control key

The settings for the driver's seat are stored inthe memory for the remote control key withwhich the car is locked. When the car isunlocked with the same remote control key thedriver's seat adopts the stored settings whenthe driver's door is opened.

NOTE

The remote control key memory is inde-pendent of seat memory.

Entry to rear seat, manual seat

Handle for lowering the backrest

Button for moving the power seat longitu-dinally

NOTE

No one may sit in the seat when it is pushedforward for entry into the rear seat.

NOTE

Lower the seat before it is pushed forward -otherwise there is a risk that the headrestraint makes contact with the sun visor.

04 Interior

Front seats

04

108

Push the seat forward

Release the seatbelt from the seatbeltguide, see also page 18.

Lift the handle

Fold the backrest forward to the lockedposition.

4. Push the seat forward.

Push the seat backward

Lift the handle and fold back the backrest.

2. Push the seat backward.

3. Adjust the seat longitudinally.

4. Refit the seatbelt in the seatbelt guide.

If the seat does not return to the same position,as before it was folded for entry, after havingbeen pushed back - then proceed as follows:

1. Sit down in the seat.

2. Lift the handle (1), see page 106, and pushthe seat to the rear end position.

04 Interior

Front seats

04

��


3. Continue to lift of the handle, and push theseat forward to the desired position andrelease the handle.

Entry to rear seat, power seat

Push the seat forward

Release the seatbelt from the seatbeltguide, see also page 18.

Lift the handle.

Fold the backrest forward to the lockedposition.

Hold down the front section of the button.

If the seat is set in a higher position - thenit will be lowered automatically to avoid thehead restraint making contact with the sunvisor.

04 Interior

Front seats

04


Push the seat backward

Lift the handle and fold back the backrest.

Hold down the rear section of the button.

3. Refit the seatbelt in the seatbelt guide.

NOTE

The seat can only be moved to the very front(+6 cm) to facilitate entry and exit to andfrom the rear seat when the backrest hasbeen folded forward. If the backrest isfolded back when the seat is in the frontposition then the seat automatically movesback approx. 6 cm after a few seconds.

WARNING

Check that the backrest is properly foldedback by pushing and pulling the headrestraint.

The belt on the front passenger side must bein the belt guide during driving, even whenthere is no passenger sitting in the seat.

Inlaid mats*

Volvo supplies inlay mats which are especiallyproduced for your car.

WARNING

Before setting off check that the inlaid matin the driver area is firmly affixed andsecured in the pins in order to avoid gettingcaught adjacent to and under the pedals.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

��


Reading lamps and interior lighting

G020201

Controls in roof console for front reading lampsand passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamp left-hand, On/Off

Interior lighting

Reading lamp right-hand, On/Off

All lighting in the passenger compartment canbe switched on in key position I and II as wellas when the engine is running. The lighting canalso be activated within 30 minutes after:

• the engine has been switched off and theremote control key is in position 0

• the car has been unlocked but the enginehas not been started.

Roof lighting

The reading lamps are switched on or off bypressing the relevant button in the roof con-sole.

Courtesy lighting

Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart-ment lighting) is switched on and off respec-tively when a side door is opened or closed.

Vanity mirror*

G020210

The lamp is automatically switched on and offrespectively when the cover is opened orclosed.

Glovebox lighting

Glovebox lighting is switched on and offrespectively when the lid is opened or closed.

Cargo area lighting

G007604

Passenger compartment lighting in rear seat andcargo area.

Apart from the passenger compartment light-ing the cargo area has a further lamp on its left-hand side.

The lighting in the passenger compartment andcargo area is switched on and off respectivelywhen the tailgate is opened or closed.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

112

Automatic lighting

Using the switch (2), see page 111, three posi-tions can be selected for the lighting the pas-senger compartment:

• Off – right-hand side (marked with 0)depressed, automatic lighting switchedoff.

• Neutral position – automatic lighting acti-vated. The dimmer function is active.

• On – left-hand side depressed, passengercompartment lighting on.

Neutral position

When the switch (2) is in neutral position pas-senger compartment lighting is switched onand off automatically in accordance with thebelow.

The passenger compartment lighting isswitched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:

• the car is unlocked with the remote controlkey or key blade.

• the engine is stopped and the remote con-trol key is turned to position 0.

Passenger compartment lighting is switchedoff when:

• the engine is started

• the car is locked with the key or remotecontrol key.

Passenger compartment lighting comes onand remains on for 5 minutes if one of the doorsis open.

If any lighting is switched on manually and thecar is locked then it will be switched off auto-matically after 5 minutes.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

113

04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

04

114

Storage spaces

04 Interior


04


Storage compartment in door panel.

Storage pocket on front edge of front seatcushions (trim dependent).

Ticket clip

Coat hanger, only for light garments.

Glovebox

Storage compartment (e.g. for CD discsand cup holder,*) and storage compart-ment behind the centre console.

Bottle holder*

Storage compartments in rear side panelswith space for up to three soda cans.

Storage compartment for first aid.

Storage pockets for maps and magazines.

WARNING

Ensure that no hard, sharp or heavy objectslie or protrude in such a way that they couldcause injury during heavy braking.

Always secure large and heavy objects witha seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

Glovebox

G024208

The owner's manual and maps can be kepthere for example. There are also holders forcoins, pens and fuel cards.

The glovebox can be locked with the remotecontrol key's detachable key blade. Furtherinformation is available on page 127.

Coat hanger

The coat hanger is located on the passengerseat head restraint. Only hang light garmentson the hanger.

04 Interior


04

116

Storage under the front armrest

G018371

There is a storage space under the armrest.There is also a smaller storage space in thedetachable armrest. Press the small buttonand lift the armrest to open the shallow com-partment. Press the large button and lift thearmrest to open the deeper compartment.

G026704

In the deeper compartment there is space for10 normal CD cases. The cases must be storedvertically on the top edge for all 10 to havespace.

Cup holder in centre console

G018372

There is space for a double cup holder underthe roller cover. The space can be used forstorage by lifting out the cup holder. Lift at therear edge of the cup holder where there is arecess.

If the cup holder is being fitted - first align itstwo guide lugs in the two recesses in the frontedge of the space and then press down therear edge of the cup holder.

Close the roller cover by gripping its front edgefrom below and pulling forward.

04 Interior


04


Storage compartment behind the gearlever

When there are no buttons for parking assis-tance and BLIS, see page 171 and page173, the space can be used as a storage com-partment.

WARNING

Objects placed in the storage compart-ments must not obstruct the parking brakelever when it is applied.

Bottle holder*

G017441

A bottle holder for larger bottles is located onthe rear of the tunnel console.

Ashtray*

G019622

An ashtray is located towards the rear of thetunnel console.

Open the ashtray by pulling the top edge of thecover.

Emptying the ashtray:

1. Press in the catch, see preceding illustra-tion, and tilt the cover up.

2. Then lift the ashtray out.

04 Interior

Rear seat

04

118

Head restraint, rear

All head restraints can be adjusted vertically tosuit the height of the passenger. The upperedge of the head restraint should be alignedwith middle of the back of the head. Raise thehead restraint as necessary.

To lower the head restraint, press the button bythe right-hand pillar at the same time as push-ing down the head restraint. To remove thehead restraint, the button by the right-hand pil-lar must be pressed while lifting out the headrestraint.

Lowering the rear seat backrest

IMPORTANT

There must be no objects on the rear seatwhen the backrest is to be folded down. Theseat belts must not be connected either.Otherwise there is a risk of damaging therear seat upholstery.

G009109

The rear seat backrests can be tipped forwardstogether, or individually, to make it easier totransport long objects.

Lowering the backrest

1. Pull the lock catch up and forward torelease the backrest. A red indicator (A)

shows that the backrest is no longer lockedin place.

2. Fold the backrest forward.

Raising the backrest

1. Fold up the backrest.

2. Place the seatbelt over the backrest.

3. Press the backrest backwards into lockedposition.

4. Check that the backrest is locked.

G007608

04 Interior

Rear seat

04

119

WARNING

Place the belt straps over the backrestsbefore folding them back to their securedpositions.

NOTE

When the backrest has been raised, the redindicator (A) should no longer be showing. Ifit is still showing then the backrest is notlocked in place.

Armrest in the rear seat

G009152

The armrest in the rear seat can be folded downfor passenger comfort or to make space for a

long load. The armrest folds down when one ofthe backrests is folded down.

For securing loads, see page 189.

04 Interior

Cargo area

04


Soft cargo cover*

G007614

Soft cargo cover.

The cargo cover is pulled over the luggage andsecured in the rear load retaining eyelets. Undo(D) and if necessary (C) during loading.

Attaching the cargo cover

1. Hook in the hooks in the front load retainingeyelets by the floor (A).

2. Fit the front brackets in (B) by pressingtogether the spring-loaded rail and fit it intoplace on both sides.

3. Fit the rear brackets in (C) in the same way.

4. Hook in the hooks in the rear load retainingeyelets (D).

Hanging up the cargo cover when not in

use

1. Unhook the hooks from the rear loadretaining eyelets (D).

2. Press the rail together and remove it fromthe rear bracket (C). Place the rail at thefront of the cargo area floor.

3. Hook in the hooks in the rail next to themounting points (B).

The cargo cover now hangs next to the rearseat backrest ready for the next time it is to beused.

Removing the cargo cover

1. Unhook the hooks and remove one rail ata time by pressing them together andremoving them from their mounting points.

2. When all mounting points are detached thecargo cover can be rolled up and placed atthe rear of the cargo area floor to makespace for bulky loads.

NOTE

The cargo cover has no load-securing func-tion. Never load anything on top of the cargocover. For securing loads, see page 189.

Hard cargo cover*

G009475

Attaching the cargo cover

1. Retract all four lock plungers by pulling thelock buttons to their end positions beforelifting in the cargo cover into the cargoarea. The lock plungers stop in retractedposition.

2. Lift the cargo cover carefully into the cargoarea sideways, turn it back around andangle the front edge up slightly.

04 Interior

Cargo area

04

121

G007611

Locks and support pins.

3. Locate the front section of the two supportpins behind the active locks (A) on bothsides.

4. Align one of the rear locks at (B) and extendthe lock plunger by moving the lock buttonforwards.

5. Align the other rear lock in the same wayand extend the lock plunger by moving thelock button forwards.

6. Extend the front lock plungers, one at atime so that they lock in their active locks(A).

The cargo cover hatch can be raised duringloading.

NOTE

The cargo cover has no load-securing func-tion. Never load anything on top of the cargocover. For securing loads, see page 189.

Removing the cargo cover

1. Retract the front lock plungers at (A) to theirend positions by pulling back the lock but-tons on both sides.

2. Retract the rear lock plungers at (B) to theirend positions by pulling back the lock but-tons on both sides.

3. Lift up and turn the cargo cover before lift-ing it from the cargo area.

Raising the floor hatch

G014316

Without cargo cover

Raise the floor hatch and secure it in the lugson both sides.

With hard cargo cover

Raise the hatch on the cargo cover. Then raisethe floor hatch and hook it into the hooklocated under the cargo cover.

04 Interior

Cargo area

04


Safety net*

G007603

The safety net is located behind the front seatbackrests. The safety net is only designed foruse when the rear seat backrests are lowered.For securing loads, see page 189.

Attaching the safety net

1. Fold down the backrests on both sides,see page 118.

2. Secure the safety net in the roof panelmountings.

3. Secure the hooks in the eyes at the seatbeltfloor mounting on both sides.

4. Stretch the straps if necessary.

5. Check all mountings.

Removing the safety net

1. Slacken the tension from the straps.

2. Undo the hooks from the eyes at the seat-belt floor mounting on both sides.

3. Detach the net from the mounting points inthe roof panels.

4. Fold up the safety net and store it in thebag.

WARNING

Loads in the cargo area must be firmlysecured even if the safety net is correctlyfitted.

Load retaining eyelets*

G007602

The load retaining eyelets are used to fastenstraps or nets to anchor items in the cargoarea.

There are two further eyelets on each side bythe seatbelt slide rail that can be used whensecuring loads when the safety net is not inuse.

For securing loads, see page 189.

04 Interior

04

123


Remote control key with key blade....................................................... 126Active locks........................................................................................... 129Keyless drive*........................................................................................ 130Battery in remote control key................................................................ 133Locking and unlocking.......................................................................... 134Alarm*.................................................................................................... 137

LOCKS AND ALARM

05 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade

05

126

Remote control key

The car is supplied with 2 remote control keys.

The remote control keys contain detachablemetal key blades for mechanical locking/unlocking of the driver's door and glovebox.

The key blades' unique code is available atauthorised Volvo workshops, which are rec-ommended for ordering new key blades.

A maximum of 6 remote control keys/keyblades can be programmed and used for onesingle car.

Turn signal indication during locking/unlocking

When the car is unlocked using the remotecontrol key or Keyless drive system, two shortflashes of the direction indicators serve to indi-cate that unlocking was correctly performed.

For locking, the indication takes place with onelong flash and only if all locks are locked, afterthe doors and the tailgate have been closed.

Personal preferences in the menu system canbe used to the deactivate indication via thedirection indicators. There will then be no visualindication as to whether the lock status is cor-rect, see page 82.

Loss of a remote control key

If you lose a remote control key, take the carand the other remote control keys to a Volvoworkshop - an authorised Volvo workshop isrecommended. The code of the missingremote control key must be erased from thesystem as a theft prevention measure.

Immobiliser

The remote control keys are fitted with codedchips. The code must be accepted by thereader (receiver) in the ignition switch. Theengine can only be started if the correct remotecontrol key with the correct code is used.

Remote control key functions

G019402

Locking – Locks all doors and the tailgate.Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to alsoclose the side windows and the sunroof.

WARNING

If the sunroof and windows are closed usingthe remote control key, check that no one isin danger of getting hands caught.

05 Locks and alarm


05


Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and thetailgate. Press and hold (at least 4 seconds)to also open the side windows.

Approach lighting – Switches on the light-ing at a distance – lights up the area arounda car parked in a dark location. Press thebutton once to switch on the interior light-ing, position/parking lamps, number platelighting and door mirror lamps (option). Thelighting is switched off automatically after30, 60 or 90 seconds. For information onsetting the delay time, see page 82.

Tailgate – Press the button once to unlockthe tailgate only1.

Panic function – Used to attract attentionin an emergency. Press and hold the redbutton for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate thedirection indicators and the horn. Thealarm can be deactivated with the samebutton, after having been armed for at least5 seconds. Otherwise the functionswitches off automatically after 30 sec-onds.

IMPORTANT

The narrow section of the remote controlkey is particularly sensitive - this containsthe chip. The engine cannot be started if thechip is damaged.

Detachable key blade

G019403

Using the remote control key's detachable keyblade:

• the driver's door can be opened manuallyif central locking cannot be activated withthe remote control key, see page 131.

• access to the glovebox can beblocked,see page 128.

• PACOS* activated/deactivated, seepage 22.

Removing the key blade

To remove the key blade from the remote con-trol key:

Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.

Pull out the key blade at the same time.

Attaching the key blade

Be careful when inserting the key blade into theremote control key.

1. Hold the remote control key with the nar-row end pointing down and lower the keyblade into its slot.

2. Lightly press the key blade to lock it inposition. You should hear a "click".

Unlocking doors with the key blade

If central locking cannot be activated with theremote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis-charged, then the driver's door can beunlocked and opened as follows:

1 The function unlocks the boot lid – it does not open.

05 Locks and alarm


05

128

1. Insert the key blade in the driver's doorkeyhole.

2. Turn the blade 45 degrees clockwise andopen the door.

See also the figure and further information onpage 131.

NOTE

When the driver's door is unlocked using thekey blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-gered. It is switched off by inserting theremote control key in the ignition switch, seepage 138.

Locking the glovebox

G020034

The glovebox is locked.

The glovebox can only be locked/unlockedusing the remote control key's detachable keyblade. (For information on the key blade, seepage 127.)

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.The keyhole is horizontal in the lockedposition.

Pull out the key blade.

– Unlocking takes place in reverse order.

NOTE

The remote control key cannot unlock theglovebox without the key blade.

This function is particularly useful for whenthe car is left for service, at a hotel or similar.

05 Locks and alarm

Active locks

05

129

G019405

Active locks for remote control key with

key blade.

Active locks for remote control key with-

out key blade.

05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

05


Keyless lock and ignition system

G007577

The keyless drive system allows the car to beunlocked, driven and locked without the needfor a key. You simply need to have the remotecontrol key with you in a pocket or a bag.

The system makes it easier and more conven-ient to open the car, for example with shoppingbags in one hand and a child in the other. Itsaves you having to take out or look for theremote control key.

The two remote control keys incorporate thekeyless drive function. You can order addi-tional remote controls. The keyless drive sys-tem can handle up to six remote controls.

Remote control key max. 1.5 m from the

car

In order to open a door or the tailgate, a remotecontrol key must be no more than approx.1.5 m from the car door handle or tailgate.

This means that the person who wishes toopen a door must have the remote control keywith him or her. It is not possible to open a doorif the remote control key is on the other side ofthe car.

The grey area in the illustration indicates therange covered by the system's antennas.

If someone leaves the car and takes a keylessdrive remote control key with them, a warningmessage appears on the information displayand a reminder signal sounds. The warningmessage disappears when the remote controlkey is brought back to the car or when the igni-tion dial is turned to position 0. The warning isonly issued if the ignition dial is in position I orII after someone has opened and closed adoor.

The warning message and reminder signal dis-appear when the remote control key is broughtback to the car after one of the followingactions:

• a door has been opened and closed

• the ignition dial has been turned to position0

• the READ button has been pressed.

Never leave any remote control key in the

car

If a remote control key with keyless drive func-tion is left in the car, it is made passive whenthe car is locked. This prevents unauthorisedentry.

If someone breaks into the car and finds theremote control key, it can be activated andused again. It is therefore important to handleall remote control keys with equal care.

Interference to remote control key

function

Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter-fere with the keyless drive system.

NOTE

Do not place/store the remote control keynear a mobile phone or metal object - nocloser than 10-15 cm.

If interference is experienced nonetheless, usethe remote control key and key blade in thenormal way, see page 126.

05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

05


Locking

G020033

Cars with the keyless system have a button on theoutside door handles.

When the remote control key is within the rangecovered by the system's antennas, the doorsand the tailgate are locked as follows:

– Push in the lock button on one of the doorhandles.

All doors must be closed before the lock buttonis pushed in. Otherwise they will not lock.

When the car is locked, the lock buttons on theinside of the doors retract.

NOTE

On cars with the keyless drive system andautomatic transmission the gear selectormust be moved to the P position and theignition dial turned to the 0 position. Other-wise the car cannot be locked or alarmed.

Unlocking

When the remote control key is within the rangecovered by the system's antennas:

1. Open the doors by pulling the relevant han-dle.

2. Open the tailgate by pressing under thetailgate opening button and lift the tailgate.

If for some reason the keyless drive function inthe remote control key is not operating, the carcan be unlocked using the remote control keyfunctions, see page 126.

Power seat – remote control key with

memory function

If several people with keyless drive remotecontrol keys get into the car, then the driver'sseat will be adjusted for the person who opensthe door first.

Unlocking doors with the key blade

G020225

If central locking cannot be activated with theremote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis-charged, then the driver's door can be openedas follows:

1. To access the keyhole: Carefully prize outthe plastic cover in the handle by insertingthe key blade in the hole on the bottom ofthe cover.

2. Unlock the door using the key blade.

05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

05


NOTE

When the driver's door is unlocked using thekey blade and is opened, the alarm is trig-gered. It is switched off by inserting theremote control key in the ignition switch, seepage 138.

Antenna location

G020075

The keyless system has a number of integratedantennae located around the car:

Rear bumper, inside centre

Cargo area, central and furthest in underthe floor

Door handle, left

Centre console, under the rear section

Door handle, right-hand rear

Centre console, under the front section

WARNING

People with pacemaker operations shouldnot come closer than 22 cm to the keylesssystem's antennae with their pacemaker.This is to prevent interference between thepacemaker and the keyless system.


The Keyless Drive system can have personalpreferences applied, see page 82.

05 Locks and alarm

Battery in remote control key

05

133

Low battery in remote control key

When the battery runs down and full function-ality cannot be guaranteed, the informationsymbol and display show KEY BATTERY

LOW VOLTAGE or REMOTE BATTERY

LOW VOLTAGE.

Changing the remote control keybattery

G019406

If the locks repeatedly fail to respond to signalsfrom the remote control key at a normal dis-tance, the battery should be replaced(type CR 2450, 3 V).

1. Place the remote control key with the key-pad downward and prize up the coverusing a small screwdriver.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Carefully examine how the battery's (+) and(–) sides are fitted (there is a diagram underthe cover).

4. Prize out and change the battery. Avoidtouching the battery and its terminals withyour fingers.

5. Refit the cover and press it in.> Dispose of the old battery in an environ-

mentally-responsible manner.

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05


Locking/unlocking the car fromoutside

For cars with the Keyless system, seepage 130.

Unlocking

Using the remote control key's unlock buttonthe car can be unlocked in two different ways(select in personal settings, see page 82):

• One press unlocks the doors and the tail-gate

• One press unlocks the driver's door and asecond press unlocks the other doors andthe tailgate.

Locking

The remote control key's lock button locks thedoors and tailgate simultaneously.

NOTE

The car can be locked even if the tailgate isopen - when the tailgate is then closed thereis a risk that the keys will be locked in*.

WARNING

Be aware of the risk of being locked in thecar when it is locked from the outside usingthe remote control key - it is then not pos-sible to open any of the doors from theinside with the door controls. Read moreabout this in the section "Deadlocks" lateron.

Rapid closing

Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) on theremote control key's lock button to close allwindows and sunroof* at the same time.

Tailgate

Unlocking

Unlocking tailgate only:

– Press the remote control key's button tounlock the tailgate.

Locking

If the doors are locked when the tailgate isclosed then it remains unlocked. Lock with theremote control key's lock button or from insidewith the central locking button in order to lockboth doors and the tailgate.

Automatic relocking

If none of the doors or the tailgate is openedwithin 2 minutes of unlocking, all are lockedagain automatically (does not apply to lockingfrom inside). This function reduces the risk thatthe car is left unlocked unintentionally. (Forcars with alarm, see page 138.)

Locking/unlocking the car from inside

G007451

With the central locking button on the driver'sdoor, the doors and tailgate can be locked orunlocked simultaneously.

Unlocking

– Press the upper section of the central lock-ing button .

05 Locks and alarm


05


Global opening

– Press the upper section of the central lock-ing button .

A long press (at least 4 seconds) alsoopens all the side windows simultaneously- for example, to quickly ventilate the pas-senger compartment during hot weather.

Locking

– Press the lower section of the central lock-ing button .

Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to alsoclose all windows and the sunroof* at thesame time.

Opening the doors

When the doors are locked from the inside:

– Pull the handle twice to unlock and openthe door.

Automatic locking

When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h thedoors and tailgate are locked automatically.

When the function is activated and the doorshave been locked they can be opened in twoways:

• Pull one of the door handles twice

• Press the upper section of the central lock-ing button and pull the door handle.

The function can be activated/deactivated bymeans of personal preferences, see page 82.

Deadlocks*1

When deadlocked, the doors cannot beopened from the inside if they are locked withthe remote control key.

The deadlocks are activated with the remotecontrol key and are set after a 10-25 seconddelay after the doors have been locked.

The car can only be unlocked from a deadlockstate with the remote control key. The driver'sdoor can also be unlocked manually with theremote control key's detachable key blade -see page 127.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to remain in the carwithout first deactivating the deadlocks inorder to avoid the risk of anyone beinglocked in.

Temporary deactivation

If someone is going to stay in the car but thedoors must be locked from the outside, thenthe deadlocks function can be temporarilyswitched off.

1 Only in combination with alarm.

05 Locks and alarm


05


Active menu options are indicated with a cross.

Display

MENU

EXIT

ENTER

Navigation

Deactivation is carried out as follows:

1. Access the menu system under CAR

SETTINGS (for a detailed description ofthe menu system, see page 82).

2. Select REDUCED GUARD.

3. Select Activate once: The instrumentpanel display shows the messageREDUCED GUARD SEE MANUAL andthe deadlocks function is switched offwhen the car is locked.

or

Select Ask on exit: Each time the key isturned to position 0 the audio system dis-play shows the message Reduced guard

ask on exit Press ENTER to reduce

guard until engine is started Press EXIT

to cancel - select one of the options:

NOTE

• Remember that the alarm is activatedwhen the car is locked.

• If any of the doors are opened from theinside then the alarm is triggered.

• If the deadlocks function shall be switchedoff: Press ENTER and lock the car. Notethat the alarm's* movement and tilt detec-tors are switched off at the same time, seepage 138.

The next time the remote control key is turnedto key position II the system is reset to zero andthe instrument panel display shows the mes-sage FULL GUARD at which the deadlocksfunction and the alarm's movement and tiltdetectors* are re-engaged.

or

• If the locking system shall not be changed:Select no options at all and lock the car. Orpress EXIT and lock the car.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05


Alarm system

When the alarm is armed, it continually moni-tors all alarm inputs.

The alarm is triggered if:

• a door, the bonnet or tailgate opens

• a non-approved key is used in the ignitionor if an attempt is made to force the lock

• a movement is detected in the passengercompartment (if fitted with a movementdetector)

• the car is raised or towed away (if fittedwith a tilt detector)

• the battery's cable is disconnected

• anyone tries to disconnect the siren

• the rear window is broken.

Alarm indicator

G020227

A red LED on the top of the instrument panelindicates the alarm system's status:

• LED not lit – the alarm is not armed.

• The LED flashes once every other second– Alarm is armed.

• The LED flashes rapidly after disarming thealarm and until key position II is activated– the alarm has been triggered.

If there is a fault in the alarm system, a messageappears on the display. At which point youshould contact a workshop - an authorisedVolvo workshop is recommended.

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair or modify alarmsystem components. All such attemptscould affect the terms of insurance.

Arming the alarm

– Press the remote control key lock button.A long flash from the car's direction indi-cators confirms that the alarm is armedand that the doors are locked.

IMPORTANT

The alarm is fully armed when the car'sdirection indicators have made one longflash and the LED on the instrument panelflashes once every other second.

Disarming the alarm

– Press the remote control key unlock but-ton. Two short flashes from the car's direc-tion indicators confirm that the alarm isdisarmed and that the doors are unlocked.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05


Automatic re-arming of the alarm

This function prevents the car being left withthe alarm disarmed unintentionally.

If the car is unlocked with the remote controlkey (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of thedoors or the tailgate is opened within 2minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is relocked at the same time.

Deactivating a triggered alarm

– Press the unlock button on the remotecontrol key or insert the key in the ignitionswitch.

Confirmation is given by two short flashes fromthe direction indicators.

If the remote control key's batteries are dis-charged then the alarm can be deactivated byunlocking the driver's door manually, insertingthe remote control key in the ignition switchand turning it to key position II.

Remote control key not working

G019420

If the alarm cannot be deactivated with theremote control key, e.g. if the key's battery isdischarged - the car can be unlocked, dis-armed and the engine started as follows:

1. Open the driver's door with the detachablekey blade. The alarm is triggered and thesiren sounds.

2. On cars with the keyless drive system: Firstremove the knob by pressing in thecatch (1) and pulling out (2).

3. Insert the remote control key in the ignitionswitch (3). The alarm is deactivated. Thealarm light flashes rapidly until the remotecontrol key is turned to key position II.

Alarm signals

When the alarm is triggered, the following hap-pens:

• A siren sounds for 25 seconds or until thealarm is deactivated. The siren has its ownbattery and works independently of the carbattery.

• The direction indicators flash for5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off.

Reduced alarm level

To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm -e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or duringtransport on a car train or car ferry - the move-ment and tilt detectors should be temporarilydeactivated.

The procedure is the same as with the tempo-rary disengaging of deadlocks - see page 135

Testing the alarm system

Testing the movement detector* in the

passenger compartment

1. Open all the windows.

2. Engage the alarm function with the remotecontrol key's lock button. Active alarmfunction is confirmed with a slowly flashingalarm indicator.

3. Please wait 30 seconds.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05


4. Test the movement detector by lifting outa bag from a seat for example.> A siren should sound and all direction

indicators should flash.

5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the carwith the remote control key.

Test of alarm for doors

1. Engage the alarm function with the remotecontrol key's lock button.


3. Unlock the driver's door with the detacha-ble key blade.

4. Open one of the doors.> A siren should sound and all direction



Test of alarm for bonnet

1. Sit in the car and deactivate the movementdetector, see the previous section"Reduced alarm level".

2. Remain sitting in the car and engage thealarm function with the remote controlkey's lock button.


4. Open the bonnet with the handle under thedashboard.> A siren should sound and all direction




General.................................................................................................. 142Refuelling.............................................................................................. 144Alcolock*............................................................................................... 148Starting the engine................................................................................ 152Starting the engine – Flexifuel............................................................... 154Keyless drive*........................................................................................ 156Manual gearbox.................................................................................... 157Automatic gearbox................................................................................ 158DRIVe Start-Stop*................................................................................. 163Brake system........................................................................................ 167DSTC – Stability and traction control system*...................................... 169Park Assist*........................................................................................... 171BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System................................................ 173Towing and recovery............................................................................. 176Start assistance.................................................................................... 180Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 181Towing equipment*............................................................................... 183Detachable towbar* ............................................................................. 185Loading................................................................................................. 189Adjusting headlamp pattern.................................................................. 190

STARTING AND DRIVING


General

06


Economical driving

Driving economically means driving smoothlywhile thinking ahead and adjusting your drivingstyle and speed to the prevailing conditions.

• Drive in the highest gear possible, adaptedto the current traffic situation and road -lower engine speeds result in lower fuelconsumption.

• Avoid driving with open windows.

• Avoid sudden unnecessary accelerationand heavy braking.

• Remove unnecessary items from the car -the greater the load the higher the fuel con-sumption.

• Use engine braking to slow down, when itcan take place without risk to other roadusers.

• A roof load and ski box increase air resis-tance, leading to higher fuel consumption- remove the load carriers when not in use.

• Do not run the engine to operating tem-perature at idling speed, but rather drivewith a light load as soon as possible - acold engine consumes more fuel than awarm one.

• Cars with the D2 engine and 6-speed man-ual transmission with Start/Stop* arestarted in 2nd gear under normal condi-tions on level ground.

For more information and further advice, seethe pages 13 and 296.

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while moving,such as downhill, this deactivates importantsystems such as the power steering andbrake servo.

Driving in water

The car can be driven through water at a maxi-mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercisedwhen passing through flowing water.

IMPORTANT

Engine damage can occur if water entersthe air filter.

In greater depths, water can enter the trans-mission. This reduces the lubricating abilityof the oils and shortens the service life of thesystems.

When driving in water, maintain a low speedand do not stop the car. When the water hasbeen passed, depress the brake pedal lightlyand check that full brake function is achieved.Water and mud for example can make the

brake linings wet resulting in delayed brakefunction.

• Clean the electric contacts of the electricengine block heater and trailer couplingafter driving in water and mud.

IMPORTANT

Do not let the car stand with water over thesills for any long period of time. This couldcause electrical malfunctions.

In the event of stalling in water, do not try torestart. Tow the car from the water.

Engine, gearbox and cooling system

Under special conditions, for example harddriving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there isa risk that the engine and drive system mayoverheat - in particular with a heavy load.

For supplementary information about over-heating when driving with a trailer - seepage 181.

• Remove any auxiliary lamps from in frontof the grille when driving in hot climates.

• In the event of a risk of overheating a built-in protection function in the gearbox is acti-vated which, amongst other things, illumi-nates the instrument panel's yellow infor-mation lamp and there is a text message


General

06

143

displayed there regarding appropriateaction - follow the recommendation given.

• If the temperature gauge for the engine'scooling system goes into the red zone -stop and let the engine idle for a fewminutes.

• If the car overheats, the air conditioningmay be switched off temporarily.

• Do not turn the engine off immediately youstop after a hard drive.

NOTE

It is normal for the engine's cooling fan tooperate for a while after the engine has beenswitched off.

Diesel engine

When driving under heavy load in a hot climate,the engine cooling fan can be replaced withone of a greater capacity than the standardmodel1. Check with your nearest Volvo dealerregarding the options for your car.

Open tailgate

WARNING

Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxicexhaust fumes can be drawn into the carthrough the cargo area.

Do not overload the battery

The electrical functions in the car load the bat-tery to varying degrees. Avoid having theremote control key in key position II when theengine is switched off. Instead use the I mode- which uses less power.

Note that the 12 volt outlet in the cargo areasupplies power even when the remote controlkey has been removed from the ignition switch.

Also, be aware of different accessories thatload the electrical system. Do not use functionswhich use a lot of power when the engine isswitched off. Examples of such functions are:

• ventilation fan

• windscreen wiper

• audio system (high volume)

• headlamps.

If the battery voltage is low the information dis-play shows the text LOW BATTERY POWER

SAVE MODE. The energy-saving functionthen shuts down certain functions or reducescertain functions such as the ventilation fanand/or audio system.

– In which case, charge the battery by star-ting the engine and then running it for atleast 15 minutes - battery charging is moreeffective during driving than running theengine at idling speed while stationary.

Slippery driving conditions

Practise driving on slippery surfaces undercontrolled conditions to learn how the carreacts.

1 For certain engines.


Refuelling

06

144

Opening the fuel filler flap

Don not forget to switch off the fuel-driven heaterbefore refuelling!

Open the fuel filler flap with the button on thelighting panel, see page 59. The engine mustbe switched off before the flap can be opened.The fuel flap is located on the rear right wing.

Closing

Push in the flap until you hear a click.

Fuel cap

1. Turn the fuel cap until an obvious resis-tance is felt.

2. Turn past the resistance until it comes to astop.

3. Take out the cap.

4. Hang up the cap on the inside of the fuelfiller flap.

NOTE

Put the petrol cap back on after refuelling.Turn until one or more clear clicks are heard.

Filling up with fuel

Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pumpnozzle cuts out.

NOTE

Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hotweather.

Fuel of a lower quality than that specifiedshould not be used as engine power and fuelconsumption could be negatively affected, formore information see the following sectionFuel.

General information on fuel

WARNING

Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get-ting fuel splashes in the eyes.

In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove anycontact lenses and rinse the eyes in plentyof water for at least 15 minutes and seekmedical attention.

Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,bioethanol and mixtures of them and dieselare highly toxic and could cause permanentinjury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medicalattention immediately if fuel has been swal-lowed.

WARNING

Fuel which spills on to the ground can beignited by the exhaust fumes.

Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-ting to refuel.

Never carry an activated mobile phonewhen refuelling. The ring signal could causespark build-up and ignite petrol fumes,leading to fire and injury.


Refuelling

06

145

IMPORTANT

Mixing different types of fuel or the use offuel not recommended invalidates Volvo'sguarantees, and any associated serviceagreement. This applies to all engines.NOTE: It does not apply to cars with enginesthat are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).

For information on fuel consumption, CO2

emissions and tank volume - see page 296.

Catalytic converter

The purpose of the catalytic converter is topurify exhaust gases. It is located in the flow ofexhaust gases close to the engine so that itquickly reaches operating temperature. Thecatalytic converter consists of a monolith(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channelwalls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho-dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts,i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem-ical reaction without being used up them-selves.

Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor

The Lambda-sond is part of a control systemintended to reduce emissions and improve fueleconomy.

An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen contentof the exhaust gases leaving the engine. Thisvalue is fed into an electronic system that con-

tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuelto air directed to the engine is continuouslyadjusted. These adjustments create optimalconditions for efficient combustion of harmfulemissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxideand nitrous oxides) using the three-way cata-lytic converter.

Petrol

Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Mostengines can be run with octane ratings of 91,95 and 98 RON.

• 91 RON must not be used for 4-cylinderengines and should only be used in excep-tional cases with other engines.

• 95 RON can be used for normal driving.

• 98 RON is recommended for optimum per-formance and minimum fuel consumption.

When driving in temperatures above +38 °C,fuel with the highest possible octane rating isrecommended for optimum performance andfuel economy.

IMPORTANT

• Always refuel with unleaded petrol so asnot to damage the catalytic converter.

• Do not use additives not recommendedby Volvo.

Bioethanol E85

Do not modify the fuel system or its compo-nents, and do not replace components withparts that are not specifically designed for usewith bioethanol.

WARNING

Methanol must not be used. A decal on theinside of the fuel filler flap shows the correctalternative fuel.

The use of components not designed forbioethanol engines could cause fire, injuryor engine damage.

Reserve fuel can

The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol,see the NOTE box, page 154.

IMPORTANT

Make sure the reserve fuel can is securelyfastened and that its cap is sealed.

WARNING

Ethanol is sensitive to sparks, and explosivegases could form in the reserve fuel can if itis refuelled with ethanol.


Refuelling

06

146

Diesel

Diesel must meet the EN 590 or JIS K2204standards.

IMPORTANT

Only ever use fuel that fulfils the Europeandiesel standard.

IMPORTANT

Diesel type fuels which must not be used:special additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fueloil, RME1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegetableoil. These fuels do not fulfil the requirementsin accordance with Volvo recommendationsand generate increased wear and enginedamage that is not covered by the Volvowarranty.

Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants,such as excessively high volumes of sulphurparticles for example. Only use diesel fuel fromwell-known producers. Never use diesel ofdubious quality.

At low temperatures (-40 °C to -6 °C), a paraffinprecipitate may form in the diesel fuel, whichmay lead to ignition problems. Special dieselfuel designed for low temperatures aroundfreezing point is available from the major oil

companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem-peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre-cipitate.

IMPORTANT

Use special winter grade fuel during coldmonths.

The risk of condensation in the fuel tank isreduced if the tank is kept well filled. Whenrefuelling, check that the area around the fuelfiller pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto thepaintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter-gent and water.

IMPORTANT

The sulphur content must be a maximum of50 ppm.

Empty tank

The design of the fuel system in a diesel enginemeans that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, thetank may need to be vented in the workshop inorder to restart the engine after fuelling.

Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star-vation, the fuel system needs a few momentsto carry out a check. Do this before starting the

engine, once the fuel tank has been filled withdiesel:

1. Insert the remote control key in the ignitionswitch and turn to key position II (seepage 152).

2. Wait approx. 1 minute.3. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/

or clutch pedal, and turn the remote controlkey to start position III.

Draining condensation from the fuel filter

The fuel filter separates condensation from thefuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera-tion.

The fuel filter must be drained at the intervalsspecified in the Service and Warranty Bookletor if you suspect that the car has been filledwith contaminated fuel.

IMPORTANT

Certain special additives remove the waterseparation in the fuel filter.

Diesel particle filter (DPF)

Diesel cars may be equipped with a particle fil-ter, which results in more efficient emissioncontrol. The particles in the exhaust gases arecollected in the filter during normal driving. So-

1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.


Refuelling

06


called "regeneration" is started in order to burnaway the particles and empty the filter. Thisrequires the engine to have reached normaloperating temperature.

Regeneration of the filter takes place automat-ically and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It maytake a little longer at a low average speed. Fuelconsumption may increase slightly duringregeneration.

The rear window heating may be activatedautomatically to increase the load on theengine during regeneration without warning.

Regeneration in cold weather

If the car is frequently driven short distances incold weather then the engine does not reachnormal operating temperature. This means thatregeneration of the diesel particle filter doesnot take place and the filter is not emptied.

When the filter has becomeapproximately 80% full of particles, the yellowinformation symbol on the instrument panelilluminates, and the message SOOT FILTER

FULL SEE OWNER MANUAL is shown on theinstrument panel display.

Start regeneration of the filter by driving the caruntil the engine reaches normal operating tem-perature, preferably on a main road or motor-way. The car should then be driven for approx-imately 20 minutes more.

NOTE

A smaller reduction of engine power may benoticed temporarily during regeneration.

When regeneration is complete the message iscleared automatically.

IMPORTANT

If the filter fills up it may be incapable offunctioning. Then it can be difficult to startthe engine and there is a risk that the filterwill have to be replaced.

Use the parking heater* in cold weather so thatthe engine reaches normal operating tempera-ture more quickly.


Alcolock*

06


General information on the Alcolock

The function of the Alcolock1 is to prevent thecar from being driven by individuals under theinfluence of alcohol. Before the engine can bestarted the driver must take a breath test thatverifies that he/she is not under the influenceof alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place inaccordance with each market's limit value inforce for driving legally.

WARNING

The Alcolock is an aid and does not exemptthe driver from responsibility. It is always theresponsibility of the driver to be sober andto drive the car safely.

Functions

1. Nozzle for breath test.2. Switch.3. Transmission button.4. Lamp for battery status.5. Lamp for result of breath test.6. Lamp indicates ready for breath test.

Operation

Battery

Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta-tus:

Indicator lamp(4)

Battery status

Green flashing Charging in pro-gress

Green Fully charged

Yellow Semi-charged

Red Discharged - fit thecharger in the holderor connect thepower supply cablefrom the glovebox.

NOTE

Store the Alcolock in its holder. This willkeep the built-in battery fully charged andthe Alcolock is activated automaticallywhen the car is opened.

1 Also called Alcoguard.


Alcolock*

06


Before starting the engine

The Alcolock is activated automatically and isthen ready for use when the car is opened.

1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green theAlcolock is ready for use.

2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. Ifthe Alcolock is outside the car when it isunlocked then it must first be activatedwith the switch (2).

3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breathand blow with an even pressure until a"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds.The result will be one of the alternatives inthe following table Result after breath

test.4. If no message is shown then the transmis-

sion to the car may have failed - in whichcase, press the button (3) to transmit theresult to the car manually.

5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolockin its holder.

6. Start the engine following an approvedbreath test within 5 minutes - otherwise itmust be repeated.

Result after breath test

Indicator lamp(5) + Display text

Specification

Green lamp +ALCOGUARD

APPROVED TEST

Start the engine - noalcohol contentmeasured.

Yellow lamp +ALCOGUARD

APPROVED TEST

Engine starting pos-sible - measuredalcohol content isabove 0.1 promillebut below the limitvalue in forceA.

Red lamp + DISAP-

PROVED TEST

WAIT 1 MINUTE

Engine starting notpossible - measuredalcohol content isabove the limit valuein forceA.

A Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits apply.See also the section entitled General information on theAlcolock on page148.

NOTE

After a completed period of driving, theengine can be restarted within 30 minuteswithout a new breath test.

To bear in mind

Before the breath test

In order to obtain correct function and as accu-rate a measurement result as possible:

• Avoid eating or drinking approx.5 minutes before the breath test.

• Avoid excess windscreen washing - thealcohol in the washer fluid may result in anincorrect measurement result.

Change of driver

In order to ensure that a new breath test is car-ried out in the event of a change of driver -depress the switch (2) and the send button (3)simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. Atwhich point the car returns to start inhibitionmode and a new approved breath test isrequired before starting the engine.

Calibration and service

The Alcolock must be checked and calibratedat a workshop2 every 12 months.

30 days before recalibration is necessary thedisplay shows ALCOGUARD CALIBR.

REQUIRED. If calibration is not carried outwithin these 30 days then normal engine star-ting will be blocked - only starting with the

2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.


Alcolock*

06


Bypass function will then be possible, seepage 150 section Emergency situation.

The message can be cleared by pressing thesend button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out onits own after approx. 2 minutes but then reap-pears each time the engine is started - onlyrecalibration at a workshop2 can clear the mes-sage permanently.

Cold or hot weather

The colder the weather the longer it takesbefore the Alcolock is ready for use:

Temperature (ºC) Maximum heat-ing time (sec-

onds)

+10 to +85 10

-5 to +10 60

-40 to -5 180

At temperatures below -20 ºC or above+60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional powersupply. The display shows ALCOGUARD

INSERT POWER CABLE. In which case, con-nect the power supply cable from the gloveboxand wait until indicator lamp (6) is green.

In extremely cold weather the heating time canbe reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.

Emergency situation

In the event of an emergency situation or theAlcolock is out of order, it is possible to bypassthe Alcolock in order to drive the car.

NOTE

All Bypass activation is logged and saved inmemory, see page 10 in the section,Recording data.

After the Bypass function has been activatedthe display shows ALCOGUARD BYPASS

ENABLED the whole time while driving andcan only be reset by a workshop2.

The Bypass function can be tested without theerror message being logged - in which case,carry out all the steps without starting the car.The error message is cleared when the car islocked.

When the Alcolock is installed, either theBypass or Emergency function is selected asthe bypassing option. This setting can bechanged afterwards at a workshop2.

Activating the Bypass function

• Depress and hold the left-hand stalkswitch READ button and the button forhazard warning flashers simultaneously forapprox. 5 seconds - the display first showsBYPASS ACTIVATED WAIT 1 MINUTE

and then ALCOGUARD BYPASS

ENABLED - after which the engine can bestarted.

This function can be activated several times.The error message shown during driving canonly be cleared at a workshop2.

Activating the Emergency function

• Depress and hold the left-hand stalkswitch READ button and the button forhazard warning flashers simultaneously forapprox. 5 seconds - the display showsALCOGUARD BYPASS ENABLED andthe engine can be started.

This function can be used once, after which areset must be made at a workshop2.



Alcolock*

06


Symbols and display messages

In addition to the previously described mes-sages, the combined instrument panel's dis-play can also show the following:

Display text Meaning/Action

ALCOGUARD

RESTART POSSI-

BLE

The engine has beenswitched off for lessthan 30 minutes -engine starting pos-sible without newtest.

ALCOGUARD

SERVICE

REQUIRED

Contact a work-shop2.

ALCOGUARD NO

SIGNAL

Transmission failed -send manually withbutton (3) or take anew breath test.

ALCOGUARD

INVALID TEST

Test failed - take anew breath test.

ALCOGUARD

BLOW LONGER

Blowing too short -blow for longer.

ALCOGUARD

BLOW SOFTER

Blowing too hard -blow more gently.

Display text Meaning/Action

ALCOGUARD

BLOW HARDER

Blowing too weak -blow harder.

ALCOGUARD

WAIT PREHEAT-

ING

Heating not finished- wait for textALCOGUARD

BLOW 5 SEC-

ONDS.



Starting the engine

06


Before starting the engine

– Apply the parking brake.

Note that if the car is equipped with an alcolockthen a breath test must first be approvedbefore the engine can be started, seepage 148.

Automatic gearbox

– Move the gear selector in position P or N.

Manual gearbox

Put the gear lever in neutral and hold the clutchpedal fully depressed. This is particularlyimportant in very cold conditions.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key fromthe ignition switch while driving or when thecar is being towed. The steering lock couldotherwise be activated, making it impossi-ble to steer the car.

The remote control key must be in key posi-tion II when the car is being towed.

NOTE

The idling speed can be noticeably higherthan normal for certain engine types duringcold starting. This is in order that the emis-sions system can reach normal operatingtemperature as quickly as possible, whichminimises exhaust emissions and protectsthe environment.

Starting the engine

IMPORTANT

If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts -wait for 3 minutes before making a furtherattempt. Starting capacity increases if thebattery is allowed to recover.

Petrol

– Turn the remote control key to key positionIII. If the engine does not start within5–10 seconds, release the key and tryagain.

Diesel

1. Turn the remote control key to key positionII.> An indicator symbol in the combined

instrument panel shows that engine pre-heating is underway, see page 51.

2. Turn the ignition key to position III whenthe indicator symbol goes out.

Autostart *

With the autostart function, there is no need tohold the remote control key (or ignition dial, oncars with Keyless Drive - see page 130) in keyposition III until the engine has started.

– Turn the key to key position III and releaseit - the starter motor then works automati-cally until the engine has started.

NOTE

If the diesel engine is started in extreme coldwithout waiting for engine preheating, thenthe automatic start sequence can bedelayed for a couple of seconds.

Key positions

0 – Locked position

The steering lock is activatedwhen the remote control keyis removed from the ignitionswitch.


Starting the engine

06

153

I – Radio position

Steering lock deactivated.Certain functions can beused. The engine's electricalsystem is not activated.

II – Driving position

The remote control key'sposition when driving. Thewhole electrical system isengaged.

III – Start position

The starter motor is activated.The remote control key isreleased when the engine hasstarted and then springs backto drive position.

A ticking sound can be heardif the key reaches an intermediate position - inwhich case, turn the key to position II and backto get rid of the sound.

When the steering lock is activated

If the front wheels are positioned so that thereis tension in the steering lock then the infor-mation display may show a warning message

and the car cannot be started. In which case,proceed as follows:

1. Remove the remote control key from theignition switch and turn the steering wheelso that the tension is released.

2. Hold the steering wheel in this position.Reinsert the key and make a new attemptto start the car.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key fromthe ignition switch while driving or when thecar is being towed. The steering lock wouldbe activated, making it impossible to steerthe car.

WARNING

Always remove the remote control key fromthe ignition switch when leaving the car,especially if there are children in the car.

Remote control keys and electronicimmobiliser

The remote control key must not hang withother keys or metal objects on the same keyring. The electronic immobiliser could be acti-vated accidentally.


Starting the engine – Flexifuel

06


General information about startingwith Flexifuel

The engine is started in the same way as in apetrol-engined car, see page 152.

NOTE

The immobiliser is activated in the event ofrepeated start attempts. Before a new startattempt is made the key/dial must first beturned back to position I or 0.

In the event of starting difficulties

If the engine does not start at the first startattempt, proceed as follows:

1. Depress the accelerator pedal 1/3 to 1/2.

2. Turn the remote control key/ignition dial tokey position III.

3. When the engine has started, ease theaccelerator pedal gradually as the enginespeed increases.

If the engine has not started after

10 seconds, second attempt

– Turn the remote control key/ignition dial tokey position III until the engine starts, butnot longer than 60 seconds.

If the engine still does not start

– Please wait for one minute, fully depressthe accelerator pedal and repeat the pre-vious procedure.

IMPORTANT

If the engine does not start despite repeatedstart attempts, contact a workshop - anauthorised Volvo workshop is recom-mended.

Engine block heater*

Electrical input to the engine block heater.

When the temperature is expected to be lowerthan –10 °C and the car has been refuelled with

bioethanol E85, an engine block heater shouldbe used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quickstarting of the engine.

The lower the temperature, the longer the timerequired with the engine block heater. At-20 °C the heater should be used for approx. 3hours.

Cars intended for E85 have an electric engineblock heater*. Starting and driving with a pre-heated engine involves significantly loweremissions and reduced fuel consumption. Forthis reason you should aim to use the engineblock heater throughout the winter months.

WARNING

The engine block heater is powered by highvoltage. Fault tracing and repair of an elec-tric engine block heater and its electricalconnections must only be carried out by aworkshop - an authorised Volvo workshopis recommended.


Starting the engine – Flexifuel

06

155

NOTE

Points to remember for carrying reservefuel:

• In the event of stalling due to an emptyfuel tank, bioethanol E85 from a reservefuel can may make the engine difficultto start in extreme cold. This is avoidedby filling the reserve fuel can with 95octane petrol.

For more information on Flexifuel's bioethanolE85 fuel, see page 145.

Fuel adaptation

If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the carhas been driven on bioethanol E85 (or viceversa) then the engine may run slightlyunevenly for a time. For this reason it is impor-tant to allow the engine to accustom itself(adapt) to the new fuel mixture.

Adaptation takes place automatically when thecar is driven for a short period at an evenspeed.

IMPORTANT

After the fuel mixture in the tank has beenchanged an adaptation should be made bydriving at an even speed for about 15minutes.

If the battery has been discharged or discon-nected then a slightly longer period of drivingis required for the adaptation as the memoryfor the electronics has been cleared.


Keyless drive*

06


General

G019410

The keyless drive system allows the car to beunlocked, driven and locked without the needfor a key, see page 130.

The ignition switch ignition dial is used in thesame way as the remote control key. One pre-condition for starting the car is that the car'sremote control key is located inside the pas-senger compartment or the cargo area.

Starting the car

– Depress the clutch pedal (cars with manualgearbox) or brake pedal (cars with auto-matic gearbox).

Petrol engine

– Press in and turn the ignition dial to keyposition III.

Diesel engine

1. First turn the ignition dial to key position IIand wait until the diesel indicator symbol inthe combined instrument panel goes out,see page 51.

2. Following which, turn the ignition dial toposition III.

Starting with the remote control key

G019420

If the remote control key's battery is dis-charged then the Keyless Drive function doesnot work. In which case, start the car by usingthe remote control key as ignition dial.

1. Press in the catch in the ignition dial.

2. Pull the ignition dial out from the ignitionswitch.

3. Insert the remote control key into the igni-tion switch and start in the same way aswith the ignition dial.


Manual gearbox

06


Gear positions

Gearshift pattern 5-speed gearbox.

Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.

The 6-speed box is available in two versions -reverse gear position differs between them.Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprintedon the gear lever.

• Depress the clutch pedal fully during eachgear change.

• Take your foot off the clutch pedal betweengear changes.

WARNING

Get into the habit of always applying theparking brake when parking on a slope - anengaged gear is not sufficient to hold the carin all situations.

Gear shift indicator - GSI*

GSI - Gear Shift Indicator -advises the driver of the opti-mum time to change gear.The indication is given with anarrow for up and down shift-ing respectively in the lowerinformation display of the

combined instrument panel, see page 49.

Reverse gear inhibitor

The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil-ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reversegear during normal forward travel.

• Start from neutral position N and onlyengage reverse gear R when the car is sta-tionary.

NOTE

With the upper variant of the shifting patternfor 6-speed gearbox (see previous illustra-tion) - first press down the gear lever in theN position in order to engage reverse gear.


Automatic gearbox

06

158

Geartronic automatic gear positions

G018264

D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/–): Manual gearpositions.

The information display shows the position ofthe gear selector using the following indica-tions: P, R, N, D, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, seepage 49.

P – Parking position

Select position P when you wish to start theengine or park the car.

IMPORTANT

The car must be stationary when positionP is selected.

NOTE

The brake pedal must be depressed in orderto be able to disengage the gear lever fromthe P position.

The gearbox is mechanically blocked whenthe P position is engaged. Always apply theparking brake when parking the car.

WARNING

Get into the habit of always applying theparking brake when parking on a slope - theautomatic transmission's P position is notsufficient to hold the car in all situations.

R – Reverse

The car must be stationary when position R isselected.

N – Neutral

No gear is engaged and the engine can bestarted. Apply the parking brake when the caris stationary with the gear selector in posi-tion N.

NOTE

The brake pedal must be depressed in orderto be able to disengage the gear lever fromthe N position if the car has been stationaryfor more than 3 seconds.

D – Drive

D is the normal driving position. The car auto-matically shifts up and down depending on thelevel of acceleration and speed. The car mustbe stationary when the gear selector is movedto position D from position R.

Geartronic manual gear positions (+/-)

The driver can also change gear manuallyusing the Geartronic automatic gearbox. Thecar engine-brakes when the accelerator pedalis released.

Manual gearshift mode is obtained by movingthe lever to the side from position D to the endposition at +/–. The information display shiftsthe indication from D to one of the figures 1 –6, which is equivalent to the gear that isengaged just then, see page 49.

• Move the lever forwards towards + (plus)to change up a gear and release it, the leverreturns to its rest position between + and–.

or

• Pull the lever back towards – (minus) tochange down a gear and release it.

The manual gearshift mode (+/–) can beselected at any time while driving.

Geartronic automatically shifts down if thedriver allows the speed to decrease lower than


Automatic gearbox

06

��

159

a level suitable for the selected gear, in orderto avoid jerking and stalling.

To return to automatic driving mode:

• Move the lever to the side to the end posi-tion at D.

Kick-down

When the accelerator pedal is pressed all theway to the floor (beyond the position normallyregarded as full acceleration) a lower gear isimmediately engaged. This is known as kick-down.

If the accelerator is released from the kick-down position, the gearbox automaticallychanges up.

Kick-down is used when maximum accelera-tion is needed, such as for overtaking.

Safety function

To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearboxcontrol program has a protective downshiftinhibitor which prevents the kick-down func-tion.

Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick-down which would result in an engine speedhigh enough to damage the engine. Nothinghappens if the driver still tries to shift down inthis way at high engine speed – the originalgear remains engaged.

When kick-down is activated the car canchange one or more gears at a time dependingon engine speed. The car changes up when theengine reaches its maximum speed in order toprevent damage to the engine.

Mechanical gear selector inhibitor

G020237

The gear selector can be moved forward andback freely between N and D. Other positionsare locked with a latch that is released with theinhibitor button on the gear selector.

With the inhibitor button depressed the levercan be moved forwards or backwards betweenP, R, N and D.

Automatic gear selector inhibitor

Cars with an automatic gearbox have specialsafety systems:

Keylock

To remove the remote control key, the gearselector must be in the P position. The key islocked in all other positions.

Parking position (P)

Stationary car with engine running:

– Hold your foot on the brake pedal whenmoving the gear selector to another posi-tion.

Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking

position (P position)

To be able to move the gear selector from theP position to other gear positions, the remotecontrol key must be in position II and the brakepedal must be depressed.

Shiftlock – Neutral (N position)

If the gear selector is in the N position and thecar has been stationary for at least three sec-onds (irrespective of whether the engine is run-ning) then the gear selector is locked in the Nposition.

To be able to move the gear selector from theN position to another gear position, the brakepedal must be depressed and the remote con-trol key must be in position II.


Automatic gearbox

06


Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor

G018263

In certain cases, it may be necessary to movethe car when it is not driveable, for example ifthe battery is flat. Proceed as follows to movethe car:

1. There is a small cover behind P-R-N-D onthe gear selector panel. Open it at the rearedge.

2. Fully insert the key blade from the remotecontrol key.

3. Hold the key blade down and at the sametime move the gear lever out of the P posi-tion.

Cold start

When starting in low temperatures, the gearchanges can sometimes feel hard. This is dueto the gearbox oil's viscosity at low tempera-tures. To reduce engine emissions, the gear-box shifts up later than normal when the engineis started at low temperatures.

NOTE

Depending on the engine temperature whenthe engine is started, the idle speed after acold start may be higher than normal forcertain engine types.

Automatic gearbox Powershift*

G018264

D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/–): Manual gearpositions.

Powershift is a six-stage automatic gearboxthat has double mechanical clutch discs incontrast to a conventional automatic gearbox.A conventional automatic gearbox has ahydraulic torque converter instead that trans-fers power from engine to gearbox.

Powershift transmission operates in the sameway and has similar controls and functions asthe Geartronic automatic transmission, descri-bed in the previous section.

In the event of uncertainty as to whether or notthe car is equipped with Powershift transmis-sion, this can be verified by checking the des-


Automatic gearbox

06

161

ignation on the decal number (5) under thebonnet - see page 284. The designa-tion ”MPS6” means that it is Powershift trans-mission - otherwise it is Geartronic automatictransmission.

To bear in mind

The transmission's double clutch has overloadprotection that is activated if it becomes toohot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with theaccelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for along time.

Overheated transmission causes the car toshake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illu-minates and the information display shows amessage. The transmission can also overheatduring slow driving in queues (10 km/h or

slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailerhitched. The transmission cools down whenthe car is stationary, with foot brake depressedand the engine running at idling speed.

Overheating during slow driving in queues canbe avoided by driving in stages: Stop the carand wait with your foot on the brake pedal untilthere is a moderate distance to the trafficahead, drive forward a short distance, and thenwait another moment with your foot on thebrake pedal.

IMPORTANT

Use the foot brake to hold the car stationaryon an uphill gradient - do not hold the carwith the accelerator pedal. The gearboxcould then overheat.

For important information regarding Powershifttransmission and towing - see page 176.

Text message and action

In some situations the display can show a mes-sage at the same time as a symbol is illumi-nated.

The table shows three steps with an increaseddegree of seriousness should the gearboxbecome too hot. In parallel with the display textthe driver is also advised that the car's elec-tronics are temporarily changing the drivingcharacteristics. Follow the instructions on theinformation display where appropriate.


Automatic gearbox

06

162

Symbol Display Driving characteristics Action

TRANSM. OVERHEAT BRAKE TO

HOLD

Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con-stant engine speed.

Gearbox overheated. Keep the car station-ary using the foot brakeA.

TRANSM. OVERHEAT PARK SAFELY Significant pulling in the car's traction. Gearbox overheated. Park the car immedi-ately in a safe manner.

TRANSM. COOLING LET ENGINE RUN No drive due to overheated gearbox. Gearbox overheated. For fastest cooling:Run the engine at idling speed with the gearlever in the N or P position until the mes-sage clears.

A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.

NOTE

The table's examples are no indication thatthe car is defective but instead show that asafety function has been activated inten-tionally to prevent damage to one of thecar's components.

WARNING

If a warning symbol combined with the textTRANSM. OVERHEAT PARK SAFELY isignored then the heat in the gearbox maybecome so high that the power transmis-sion between engine and gearbox is tem-porarily halted in order to prevent the clutchfrom malfunctioning - the car then losesdrive and is stationary until gearbox tem-perature has cooled to an acceptable level.

For more possible display messages with theirrespective proposals for solutions concerningautomatic transmission, see page 54.

A display text clears automatically after theaction has been carried out or after one presson the indicator stalk READ button.


DRIVe Start-Stop*

06

��


General

Quieter and cleaner

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo-ration's core values and it influences all of ouroperations. This target-orientation has resultedin the DRIVe vehicle series whose conceptconsists of an interaction between several sep-arate energy-saving functions, all with thecommon purpose of reducing fuel consump-tion, which in turn contributes to reducedexhaust emissions.

Start/Stop

In addition to being equipped with a reliableand fuel-efficient diesel engine, this car'sengine is equipped with a Start and Stop func-tion which comes into action in the event of e.g.stationary traffic queues or waiting at trafficlights - see the detailed description on the nextpage.

The engine's automatic restart sequence runsso smoothly that it is hardly noticeable that theengine has actually been switched off. Theexperience is that the engine has been runningthe whole time but with an extremely quiet andlow idling speed.

The Start/Stop function gives the driver theopportunity for a more active environmentallyconscious driving style by means of being ableto disengage gear and letting the engine auto-stop, whenever appropriate.

Smart charging

The car's kinetic energy is used during enginebraking by means of it being converted intoelectricity and stored in the car's battery.

Adapted power steering

Another DRIVe function is that the power steer-ing's energy take-off is adapted according torequirements. By means of optimisation andthe introduction of an energy saving functionthe energy take-off can be minimised on occa-sions where power assistance (help in turningthe steering wheel) is not necessary.

Aerodynamics

The DRIVe concept also includes a loweredchassis, front and rear spoilers with low windresistance, as well as specially developedwheel rims1.

1 The range varies depending on the market.


DRIVe Start-Stop*

06


Function and operation

On/Off button and display text AUTO START-STOP ON.

The Start/Stop system is activated automati-cally when the engine is started with the key.The driver is made aware of this function bymeans of the On/Off button's green lamp beingilluminated.

NOTE

After starting with the key and each auto-stop the car must first reach 5 km/h beforethe automatic Start/Stop function is re-acti-vated - following which certain conditionsmust also be fulfilled, refer to these underthe heading "The engine does not auto-stop".

All of the car's normal systems such as lighting,radio, etc. work as normal even with an auto-stopped engine, except that some equipmentmay have its function temporarily reduced, e.g.the climate control system's fan speed orextremely high volume on the audio system.

Auto-stopping the engine

In order for the engine to stop automatically thecar must be stationary - however, theStart/Stop function does accept slow rolling,the equivalent to normal walking pace:

• Set the gear lever in neutral position andrelease the clutch pedal - the engine stopsautomatically.

The display text ENGINE IN

AUTO START, and the but-ton's illuminated green lamp,reminds - and indicates - thatthe engine has been auto-stopped.

Auto-starting the engine

With the gear lever in neutral position:

• Depress the clutch pedal - the enginestarts automatically.

or

• Depress the accelerator pedal - the enginestarts automatically.

On a downhill gradient there is also the optionto start the engine automatically as follows:

• Release the foot brake and allow the car tomove off - the engine starts automaticallywhen the speed exceeds normal walkingpace.

After starting the engine:

• Engage a suitable gear and continue thejourney.

Gear indicator

An essential detail in connection with environ-mental driving is to drive in the right gear andto change gear in time.

The driver is assisted by anindicator which notifies thedriver when it is most advan-tageous to engage the nexthigher or lower gear - GSI(Gear Shift Indicator).


DRIVe Start-Stop*

06


Indication is made with an up or down arrow inthe combined instrument panel's lower dis-play.

Deactivating the Start/Stop function

The information display shows here that the Start/Stop function has been disengaged.

In certain situations, it mayadvisable to temporarilyswitch off the automaticStart/Stop function - this iscarried out by pressing thisbutton once, at which pointthe button's lamp goes out.

Disengaged Start/Stop function is indicated bya message appearing on the information dis-play for about 5 seconds.

The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it isreactivated with the button or until the nexttime the engine is started with the key.

Limitations

The engine does not auto-stop

Even if the Start/Stop function is activated, theengine does not auto-stop if:

• the driver has opened the seatbelt'sbuckle.

• the car has not stopped completely.

• the car has been reversed and reverse gearis disengaged.

• the engine does not have normal operatingtemperature.

• outside temperature is below freezingpoint or above approx. 30 °C.

• the environment in the passenger com-partment differs from the preset values -indicated by the ventilation fan running ata high speed.

• the capacity of the battery is below theminimum permissible level.

• battery temperature is below freezing pointor above approx. 55 °C.

The engine auto-starts without driver

intervention

An auto-stopped engine may restart in somecases without the driver having decided thatthe journey should continue. In the followingcases the engine auto-starts even if the driver

has not depressed the clutch pedal in order toengage a gear:

• The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened.

• Misting forms on the windows.

• The outside temperature is below freezingpoint or above approx. 30 °C.

• There is a temporarily high current take-offor battery capacity has dropped below thelowest permissible level.

• The car starts to roll - faster than the equiv-alent normal walking pace.

• Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.

WARNING

Do not open the bonnet when the enginehas stopped automatically - the engine maysuddenly start automatically. In order toavoid starting automatically with raisedbonnet:

• Engage a gear and apply the parkingbrake.

The engine does not auto-start

In the following cases the engine does notauto-start after having auto-stopped:

• The driver's seatbelt buckle has beenopened - a display text prompts the driverto start the engine normally.

• A gear is engaged without declutching - adisplay text prompts the driver to set the


DRIVe Start-Stop*

06


gear lever in neutral position in order toenable auto-start.

Involuntary engine stop

In the event that a start-up fails and the enginestops, proceed as follows:

1. Depress the clutch pedal again - the enginestarts automatically after the gear lever hasbeen set in neutral position. Prior to this theinformation display showed the text PUT

GEAR IN NEUTRAL TO START.

Text message

In combination with this indicatorlamp the Start/Stop function maydisplay text messages on the infor-mation display for certain situa-tions. A recommended action

should be performed for some of them. Thefollowing table shows some examples.

Message

AUTO START-

STOP ON

Illuminates forabout 5 secondsafter Start/Stop hasbeen activated.

AUTO START-

STOP OFF

Illuminates forabout 5 secondsafter Start/Stop hasbeen switched off.

Message

TURN KEY TO

START

The engine will notauto-startA - per-form a normal startusing the key.

PUT GEAR IN

NEUTRAL TO

START

Set the gear lever inneutral positionB.

DEPRESS

CLUTCH PEDAL

TO START

The engine is readyto auto-start - wait-ing for declutching.

AUTO START-

STOP SERVICE

REQUIRED

Start/Stop functiondisengaged. A work-shop should be con-tacted.

A Occurs if the seatbelt is unbuckled after the engine has auto-stopped, for example.

B Occurs if a gear is engaged without declutching after theengine has auto-stopped.

If a message does not go out after performingan action a workshop should be contacted - anauthorised Volvo workshop is recommended,which also applies in the event of the need forany other form of technical assistance.


Brake system

06

167

Brake servo

If the car is rolling or is being towed with theengine turned off, the brake pedal must bedepressed about 5 times harder than when theengine is running. If the brake pedal isdepressed when the engine is started, you willfeel the pedal drop. This is normal and due tothe brake servo becoming active. This may bemore noticeable if the car has EmergencyBrake Assistance (EBA).

WARNING

The brake servo only works when the engineis running.

NOTE

If braking with the engine switched off,press the brake pedal sharply once, notrepeatedly.

Brake circuits

This symbol illuminates if a brakecircuit is not working.

If a fault should occur in one of thecircuits, it is still possible to brake

the car. The brake pedal will travel further andmay feel softer than normal. Harder pressureon the pedal is needed to produce the normalbraking effect.

Dampness can affect braking

characteristics

Brake components become wet when the caris driven in heavy rain, through pools of wateror when the car is washed. This may alter brakepad friction characteristics so that there is adelay before braking effect is noticed.

Press the brake pedal lightly from time to timeif driving for long stretches in rain or slushysnow, as well as after setting off in very dampor cold weather. This warms up the brake padsand dries off any water. This precaution is alsorecommended before parking the car for a longperiod in such weather conditions.

If the brakes are used heavily

When driving in the Alps or other roads withsimilar characteristics, the car's brakes areheavily loaded even if the brake pedal is notbeing depressed especially hard.

Because speed is often low, the brakes are notcooled as effectively as when driving on flatroads at higher speed.

So as not to overload the brakes, shift downwhen driving downhill instead of using the footbrake. Use the same gear driving downhill asyou would use driving uphill. This uses enginebraking more efficiently so the foot brake isonly required for brief periods.

Bear in mind that driving with a trailer puts anadditional load on the car's brakes.

Anti-lock braking system - ABS

The anti-lock braking system(ABS) prevents the wheels fromlocking up during braking.

This means the ability to steer ismaintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid ahazard for example.

After the engine has been started, the ABS willperform a brief self-test at a speed ofabout 20 km/h. This can be felt and heard aspulses in the brake pedal.

To get the most out of the ABS:

1. Depress the brake pedal with full force.Pulses will be felt.

2. Steer the car in the direction of travel. Donot release the pressure on the pedal.

Practice braking with the ABS system in a traf-fic-free area and in different weather condi-tions.


Brake system

06

168

Emergency Brake Assistance – EBA

For sudden braking, EBA (Emergency BrakeAssist) provides full-strength braking instanta-neously. The EBA function senses when heavybraking is underway by registering how quicklythe brake pedal is depressed.

Continue braking without easing off on thebrake pedal. The function disengages whenthe pressure on the brake pedal eases.

This function is always active. It cannot be dis-engaged.

WARNING

If the BRAKE and ABS warning symbols illu-minate at the same time, there may be afault in the brake system. If the level in thebrake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage,drive carefully to the nearest workshop andhave the brake system checked - an author-ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in thebrake fluid reservoir, do not drive furtherbefore topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid mustbe investigated.

NOTE

When EBA is activated the brake pedal low-ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)the brake pedal as long as necessary. If thebrake pedal is released then all brakingceases.

Emergency brake lights and automatic

hazard warning flashers

Emergency brake lights are activated to alertvehicles behind about sudden braking. Thefunction means that the brake light flashesinstead of - as in normal braking - shining witha constant glow.

Emergency brake lights are activated atspeeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system isworking and/or in the event of sudden braking.After the car's speed has been slowed below10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing tothe normal constant glow - while at the sametime the hazard warning flashers are activated,and they flash until the driver changes enginespeed with the accelerator pedal or they aredeactivated with their button, see page 71.


DSTC – Stability and traction control system*

06


General

The stability and traction control system, DSTC(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control) helpsthe driver to avoid skidding and improves thecar's traction.

A pulsing sound may be noticed during brakingor acceleration when the system is in action.The car may accelerate slower than expectedwhen the accelerator pedal is depressed.

Active Yaw Control

The function limits the driving and brake forceof the wheels individually in order to stabilisethe car.

Spin Control

The function prevents the driving wheels fromspinning against the road surface during accel-eration.

Traction control system

The function is active at low speed and trans-fers power from the driving wheel that is spin-ning to the one that is not.

Reduced operation

G029057

Controls and information display.

Thumbwheel1

RESET button1

The stability system is activated automaticallyeach time the car is started.

System operation during skidding and accel-eration can be partially deactivated. Operationduring skidding is then delayed and so allowsmore skidding which provides greater freedomfor dynamic driving. Traction in deep snow orsand is improved at the same time as acceler-ation is no longer limited.

Operation

1. Turn the thumbwheel until the DSTC menuappears.

DSTC ON means that the system functionis unchanged.

DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF means thatsystem operation is reduced.

2. Press and hold the RESET button until theDSTC menu is changed.

The system remains reduced until thedriver reactivates it or until the engine isswitched off - after the engine is started thenext time DSTC is back in its normal modeagain.

WARNING

Suppressing system function may alter thedriving characteristics of the car.

NOTE

DSTC ON is shown for several seconds onthe display each time the engine is started.

1 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.


DSTC – Stability and traction control system*

06


Messages on the information display

TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY

OFF means that the system has been tempo-rarily reduced due to excessive brake tempera-ture.

– The function is reactivated automaticallywhen the brakes have cooled.

ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED systemdisabled due to a fault.

– Stop the car in a safe place and turn off theengine.> If the message remains when the engine

is restarted, drive to a workshop. Anauthorised Volvo workshop is recom-mended.

Symbols in the combined instrumentpanel

DSTC system

Information

If the symbols and are displayed at thesame time:

• Read the message on the information dis-play.

If the symbol appears alone then it mayappear as follows:

• Flashing light means that the DSTC systemis now being activated.

• Constant glow for 2 seconds means sys-tem check when the engine is started.

• Constant glow after starting the engine orwhile driving means that there is a fault inthe DSTC system.


Park Assist*

06


General information on parkingassistance

Parking assistance front and rear.

Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.A signal indicates the distance to a detectedobstacle.

WARNING

Parking assistance does not relinquish thedriver's own responsibility during parking.The sensors have blind spots where obsta-cles cannot be detected. Be aware of chil-dren or animals near the car.

Variants

Parking assistance is available in two variants:

• Rear only.

• Both front and rear.

Function

The frequency of the signal increases theshorter the distance to an obstacle, in front ofor behind the car. If the volume of anotheraudio source from the audio system is high,then this is automatically lowered.

The tone becomes constant at a distance ofabout 30 cm. If there are obstacles within thisdistance both behind and in front of the car, thesignal alternates between left and right-handspeakers.

Rear parking assistance only

The system is automatically engaged when thecar is started.

Rear parking assistance is activated whenreverse gear is engaged and the message Park

Assist active EXIT to deactivate is shown onthe audio system's display.

If the system is switched off, the display showsPark Assist deactivated ENTER to

activate as soon as reverse gear is engaged.To change the settings, see page 82.

The distance covered behind the car isabout 1.5 metres. The signal comes from therear loudspeakers.

Limitations

The system must be deactivated when revers-ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbaror similar. Otherwise the trailer or bike carrierwould trigger the sensors.

NOTE

Rear parking assistance is deactivatedautomatically when towing a trailer if a Volvogenuine trailer cable is used.

Parking assistance both front and rear

Button for Off/On (button location depends onother selected equipment).


Park Assist*

06


The system is automatically engaged when thecar is started and the switch's On/Off lamp isilluminated. If parking assistance is switchedoff with the button, the lamp goes out.

Front

Front parking assistance is active at speedsbelow 15 km/h. The system is deactivated athigher speeds. When the speed is below10 km/h the system is reactivated.

The distance covered to the front of the car isabout 0.8 metres. The signal for obstacles infront comes from the front loudspeakers.

Limitations

Front parking assistance cannot be combinedwith extra lights because the sensors are affec-ted by the extra lights.

Rear

Rear parking assistance is activated whenreverse gear is engaged.

The distance covered to the rear of the car isabout 1.5 metres. The signal for obstaclesbehind comes from the rear loudspeakers.

Limitations

See the previous section Rear parking assis-tance only.

Fault indicator

If the information symbol illumi-nates with constant glow and thedisplay shows PARK ASSIST

SERVICE REQUIRED then park-ing assistance is disengaged. For

attention, contact a workshop - an authorisedVolvo workshop is recommended.

IMPORTANT

In certain conditions the parking assistancesystem may produce incorrect warning sig-nals that are caused by external soundsources that emit the same ultrasonic fre-quencies that the system works with.

Examples of such sources include horns,wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes andexhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

Cleaning the sensors

Parking assistance sensors.

The sensors must be cleaned regularly toensure that they work properly. Clean themwith water and car shampoo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors maycause incorrect warning signals.


BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System

06


General

G020295

Rearview mirror with BLIS system.

BLIS camera

Indicator lamp

BLIS symbol

WARNING

The system is a supplement to, not areplacement for, a safe driving style and useof the rearview mirrors. It can never replacethe driver's attention and responsibility. Theresponsibility for changing lanes safelyalways rests with the driver.

BLIS is an information system that under cer-tain conditions can help to draw the driver'sattention to vehicles moving in the same direc-tion in the so-called "blind spot".

The system is designed to work most effec-tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lanehighways.

BLIS is based on camera technology. The cam-eras (1) are located under the door mirrors.

When a camera has detected a vehicle insidethe blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2) illu-minates with a constant glow.

NOTE

The lamp illuminates on the side of the carwhere the system has detected the vehicle.If the car is overtaken on both sides at thesame time then both lamps illuminate.

BLIS advises the driver with a message if a faultarises in the system. If for example the sys-tem's cameras are obscured then the BLISindicator lamp flashes and a message is shownin the information display. In such cases, checkand clean the lenses. If necessary, the systemcan be switched off temporarily by pressing theBLIS button see page 174.

Blind spots

A = approx. 3.0 m, B = approx. 9.5 m.

When BLIS operates

The system operates when the car is driven ata speed above 10 km/h.

Overtaking

The system is designed to react if you overtakeanother vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/hfaster than the other vehicle.

The system is designed to react if you are over-taken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km/hfaster than your vehicle.



06


WARNING

BLIS does not work in sharp bends.

BLIS does not work when the car is revers-ing.

A wide trailer coupled to the car can concealother vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre-vent the vehicle in the screened area frombeing detected by BLIS.

Daylight and darkness

In daylight the system reacts to the shape ofthe surrounding vehicles. The system isdesigned to detect motor vehicles such ascars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.

In darkness the system reacts to the head-lamps of surrounding vehicles. Vehicles withheadlamps that are switched off are notdetected by the system. This means for exam-ple that the system does not react to a trailerwithout headlamps which is towed behind acar or truck.

WARNING

The system does not react to cyclists ormoped riders.

The BLIS cameras have limitations similar tothose of the human eye, i.e. they do not seeas well in e.g. heavy snowfall, strongoncoming light or thick fog.

Activate/deactivate

Button for Off/On (button location depends onother selected equipment).

BLIS is activated when the engine is started.The indicator lamps in the door panels flashthree times when BLIS is activated.

The system can be deactivated/activated bypressing the BLIS button.

When BLIS is deactivated the light in the buttongoes out and a text message is shown on theinstrument panel display.

When BLIS is activated the light in the buttonilluminates, a new text message is shown onthe display and the indicator lamps in the doorpanels flash three times. Press the READ but-

ton to clear the text message. For more infor-mation on messages, see page 54.

BLIS system message

Text on the dis-play

Specification

BLIS ON The BLIS system isactivated.

BLIS REDUCED

FUNCTION

Reduced function indata transmissionbetween the BLISsystem's cameraand the car's electri-cal system.

The camera resetsitself when the datatransmissionbetween the BLISsystem's cameraand the car's electri-cal system returns tonormal.

BLIS CAMERA

BLOCKED

One or both cam-eras blocked - cleanthe lenses.



06


Text on the dis-play

Specification

BLIS SERVICE

REQUIRED

Blind spot syst. dis-engaged - contact aworkshop.

BLIS OFF The BLIS system isdeactivated.

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS system componentsmust only be performed by a workshop - anauthorised Volvo workshop is recom-mended.

Cleaning

In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam-era lenses must be clean. The lenses can becleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge.Clean the lenses carefully so that they are notscratched.

IMPORTANT

The lenses are electrically heated to melt iceor snow. If necessary, brush snow awayfrom the lenses.

Limitations

In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp mayilluminate despite there being no other vehiclewithin the blind spot.

NOTE

If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso-lated occasions despite there being noother vehicle within the blind spot then thisdoes not mean that a fault has arisen in thesystem.

In the event of a fault in the BLIS system thedisplay shows the text BLIS SERVICEREQUIRED.

Here are several examples of situations wherethe BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even ifthere is no other vehicle within the blind spot.

Reflection from shiny wet road surface.

G018177

Own shadow on large, light, smooth surface, e.g.noise barrier or concrete road surface.

Low sun in the camera.


Towing and recovery

06

176

Start assistance

Use a donor battery if the battery is dischargedand the engine does not start. Do not tow thecar to bump start the engine, see page 180.

IMPORTANT

Bump starting the car can damage the cat-alytic converter.

Towing

Find out the statutory maximum speed limit fortowing before towing begins.

1. Turn the remote control key to position IIand unlock the steering lock so that the carcan be steered, see page 153.

2. The key must remain in the ignition switchwhile the car is being towed.

3. Keep the towline taut when the towingvehicle reduces speed by holding your footgently pressed on the brake pedal -thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking.

4. Be prepared to brake to stop.

WARNING

• The steering lock must be unlockedbefore towing - the lock stays in theposition it was in when the voltage wasdisconnected.

• The remote control key must be in keyposition II - in position I all airbags aredeactivated.

• Never remove the key from the ignitionswitch when the car is being towed.

NOTE

If the car is de-energised then the steeringlock must be unlocked using a donor bat-tery before towing can be started.

WARNING

The brake servo and power steering do notwork when the engine is switched off. Thebrake pedal must be pressed about fivetimes harder than normal, and the steeringwill be considerably heavier than normal.

Manual gearbox

Prior to towing:

– Move gear lever into neutral and releasethe parking brake.

Automatic gearbox Geartronic

Prior to towing:

– Move the gear selector to position N andrelease the parking brake.

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be towed withthe wheels rolling forward.

• Cars with automatic gearbox must notbe towed at speeds above 80 km/h orfurther than 80 km.

Automatic gearbox Powershift

The model with Powershift transmissionshould not be towed as it is dependent on theengine running in order to receive sufficientlubrication. If towing still has to take place, theroute must be as short as possible and thenwith very low speed.

In the event of uncertainty as to whether or notthe car is equipped with Powershift transmis-sion, this can be verified by checking the des-ignation on the decal number (5) under thebonnet - see page 284. The designation"MPS6" means that it is Powershift transmis-sion - otherwise it is Geartronic transmission.


Towing and recovery

06

177

IMPORTANT

Avoid towing.

• However, the car can be towed for ashort distance at low speed to move itfrom a dangerous position - not furtherthan 10 km and not faster than10 km/h. Note that the car must alwaysbe towed with the wheels rolling for-ward.

• In the event of moving a longer distancethan 10 km, the car must be transportedwith the drive wheels raised from theroad - professional recovery is recom-mended.

Prior to towing:

– Move the gear selector to position N andrelease the parking brake.


Towing and recovery

06

178

Towing eye

The towing eye is screwed into a threadedsocket behind a cover on the right-hand sideof the bumper, front or rear.

Fitting the towing eye

Take out the towing eye (1) that is locatedunder the floor hatch in the cargo area.

The cover for the towing eye's attachmentpoint is available in two variants whichmust be opened in different ways:

• Open the variant with a recess using acoin or similar inserted in the recess,

turning it outwards. Then turn out thecover completely and remove it.

• The second variant has a marking alongone side or in a corner: Press the mark-ing with a finger and fold out the oppo-site side/corner at the same time usinga coin or similar - the cover turns aroundits axis and can then be removed.

Screw the towing eye right in up to itsflange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.using the wheel wrench.

After use, unscrew the towing eye andreturn it to its place.

Finish by refitting the cover onto thebumper.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye is only designed for towingon roads - not for pulling the car unstuck orout of a ditch. Call a recovery service forrecovery assistance.


Towing and recovery

06

179

NOTE

On certain cars with fitted towbar the towingeye cannot be secured in the rear mounting.In which case, secure the tow rope in thetowbar.

For this reason it is advisable to store thetowbar's towball in the car, see page 183.

Recovery

Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

The car must always be towed with the wheelsrolling forward.

IMPORTANT

Cars with automatic gearbox must only betowed with drive wheels raised from theroad.


Start assistance

06

180

Starting with a donor battery

If the battery is flat then the car can be startedwith current from another battery.

When jump starting the car, the following stepsare recommended to avoid short circuits orother damage:

1. Turn the remote control key to key position0.

2. Check that the donor battery has a voltageof 12 V.

3. If the donor battery is installed in anothercar - switch off the donor car's engine andmake sure that the two cars do not toucheach other.

4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clampsto the donor battery's positive terminal (1).

IMPORTANT

Connect the start cable carefully to avoidshort circuits with other components in theengine compartment.

5. Connect the red jump lead's other clamponto the car's positive terminal (2).

6. Connect one of the black jump lead'sclamps to the donor battery's negative ter-minal (3).

7. Fit the other clamp to a grounding point,such as by the left-hand spring strut (4).

8. Check that the jump lead clamps areaffixed securely so that there are no sparksduring the starting procedure.

9. Start the engine of the "donor car" andallow it to run a few minutes at a speedslightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.

10. Start the engine in the car with the dis-charged battery.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the crocodile clips during thestart procedure. There is a risk of sparksforming.

11. Remove the jump leads in reverse order -first the black and then the red.> Make sure that none of the black jump

lead's clamps comes into contact withthe battery's positive terminal or theclamp connected to the red jump lead.

WARNING

• The battery can generate oxyhydrogengas, which is highly explosive. A sparkcan be formed if a jump lead is con-nected incorrectly, and this can beenough for the battery to explode.

• The battery contains sulphuric acid,which can cause serious burns.

• If sulphuric acid comes into contactwith eyes, skin or clothing, flush withlarge quantities of water. If acidsplashes into the eyes - seek medicalattention immediately.

For more information on the car's battery - seepage 230.


Driving with a trailer

06

181

General

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. Thetotal of the weight of the passengers and allaccessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car'spayload by a corresponding weight. For moredetailed information on weights, seepage 287.

If the towing bracket is fitted by an authorisedVolvo workshop, then the car is delivered withthe necessary equipment for driving with atrailer.

• The car's towing bracket must be of anapproved type.

• If the towbar is retrofitted, check with aVolvo dealer that the car is fully equippedfor driving with a trailer.

• Distribute the load on the trailer so that theweight on the towing bracket follows thespecified maximum towball load.

• Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-mended pressure for a full load. For tyrepressure decal location, see page 198.

• Clean the towing bracket regularly andgrease the towball1.

• The engine is loaded more heavily thanusual when driving with a trailer.

• Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car isbrand new. Please wait until it has beendriven at least 1000 km.

• The brakes are loaded much more thanusual on long and steep downhill slopes.Downshift to a lower gear and adjust yourspeed.

• Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines ofmore than 12%.

• For safety reasons, the maximum permit-ted speed for the car when coupled with atrailer should not be exceeded. Follow theregulations in force for the permittedspeeds and weights.

• Maintain a low speed when driving with atrailer up long, steep ascents.

Trailer weights

For information on Volvo's permitted trailerweights, see page 287.

NOTE

The stated maximum permitted trailerweights are those permitted by Volvo.National vehicle regulations can further limittrailer weights and speeds. Towbars can becertified for higher towing weights than thecar can actually tow.

WARNING

Follow the stated recommendations fortrailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailermay be difficult to control in the event ofsudden movement and braking.

Manual gearbox

Overheating

When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hotclimate there may be a risk of overheating.

• Do not run the engine at higher revolutionsthan 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm)- otherwise the oil temperature maybecome too high.

Diesel engine 5-cyl

• If an engine starts to run too hot, the instru-ment panel will display a text messagewhich recommends switching to a lowergear - follow the recommendation given.

• In the event of a risk of overheating theoptimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000rpm for optimum circulation of the coolant.

1 Do not lubricate the towball if using a stabiliser hitch.


Driving with a trailer

06

182

Automatic gearbox

Overheating

When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hotclimate there may be a risk of overheating.

• An automatic gearbox selects the optimumgear related to load and engine speed.

Steep inclines

• Do not lock the automatic transmission ina higher gear than the engine "can copewith" - it is not always a good idea to driveat a high gear with low engine revolutions.

IMPORTANT

See also the specific information on slowdriving with trailer for cars with thePowershift automatic transmission on page161.

Parking on a hill

1. Depress the foot brake.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Move the gear selector to parking positionP.

4. Release the foot brake.

• Move the gear selector to park position Pwhen parking an automatic car with a

hitched trailer. Always use the parkingbrake.

• Block the wheels with chocks when park-ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.

Starting on a hill

1. Depress the foot brake.

2. Move the gear selector to driving posi-tion D.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.


Towing equipment*

06


Towbar

If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar,the installation instructions for the loose sec-tion must be followed carefully, seepage 185.

WARNING

If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachabletowbar:

• Follow the installation instructions care-fully.

• The detachable section must be lockedwith the key before setting off.

• Check that the indicator window showsgreen.

Important checks

• The towbar's towball must be cleaned andgreased regularly.

NOTE

If a towball hitch with vibration damper isused, it is not necessary to grease the tow-ball.

Storing the towbar

G031115

Towbar storage space.

IMPORTANT

Always remove the towbar after use andstore it in the appointed location in the car,firmly fastened with its strap.

Trailer cable

G014589

An adapter is required if the car's towingbracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approvedby Volvo. Make sure the cable does not dragon the ground.


Towing equipment*

06


Specifications

G009519 G009518

G009522

Dimensions for mounting points (mm)

A B C D E F G

854 98 100 140 130 113 150


Detachable towbar*

06

��


Fitting the towbar

G017317

1. Remove the protective cover by first press-ing in the catch and then pulling thecover straight back .

G020301

2. Ensure that the mechanism is in theunlocked position by turning the key clock-wise.

G020302

3. Check that the indicator window (3) showsred. If the window does not show red,press in and turn the locking wheel anti-clockwise until you hear a click.


Detachable towbar*

06


G020304

4. Insert the towbar until you hear a click.

G020306

5. Check that the indicator window showsgreen.

G020307

6. Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi-tion. Remove the key from the lock.

G020309

7. Check that the towbar is secure by pullingit up, down and back.

WARNING

If the towbar is not fitted correctly then itmust be detached and reattached inaccordance with the previous instructions.

IMPORTANT

Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,the remainder of the towbar should be cleanand dry.


Detachable towbar*

06


G020310

8. Safety cable.

WARNING

Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable tothe correct place.

Removing the towbar

G020301

1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to theunlocked position.

G020312

2. Push in the locking wheel and turn itanticlockwise until you hear a click.


Detachable towbar*

06


G020314

3. Turn the locking wheel down fully, until itcomes to a stop. Hold it in this positionwhile pulling the towbar rearward andupward.

WARNING

Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in thecar, see page 183.

G017318

4. Push on the protective cover.


Loading

06


General

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. Thetotal of the weight of the passengers and allaccessories reduces the car's payload by acorresponding weight. For more detailed infor-mation on weights, see page 287.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics changedepending on how heavily it is loaded andhow the load is distributed.

Loading the cargo area

Stop the engine and apply the parking brakewhen loading or unloading long objects. Thegear lever or gear selector can be knocked outof position by long loads, which could set thecar in motion.

To increase the size of the cargo area, the headrestraints can be removed and the seats foldeddown, see page 118.

Place the load firmly against the backrest infront.

• The head rests can be removed so thatthey are not damaged.

• Put wide loads in the centre.

• Heavy objects should be placed as low aspossible. Avoid placing heavy loads on alowered backrest.

• Cover sharp edges with something soft toavoid damaging the upholstery or the glasssurface of the tailgate.

• Secure all loads to the load retaining eye-lets with straps or web lashings.

WARNING

A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in afrontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carrythe impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.

WARNING

Never load cargo above the backrest.

The protection provided by the inflatablecurtain in the headlining may be compro-mised or eliminated by high loads.

Always secure the load. During heavy brak-ing the load may otherwise shift, causinginjury to the car's occupants.

Load carriers*

To avoid damaging the car and for maximumpossible safety while driving, it is recom-mended to use load carriers specially designedfor your car by Volvo.

Carefully follow the mounting instructions sup-plied with the carriers.

• Check periodically that the load carriersand load are properly secured. Lash theload securely with retaining straps.

• Distribute the load evenly over the loadcarriers. Put the heaviest objects at thebottom.

• The size of the area exposed to the wind,and therefore fuel consumption, increasewith the load's size.

• Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,heavy braking and hard cornering.

WARNING

The car's centre of gravity and driving cha-racteristics are altered by roof loads.


Adjusting headlamp pattern

06

190

Correct light pattern for left or right-hand traffic

G020317

Headlamp pattern for left-hand traffic.

Headlamp pattern for right-hand traffic.

The headlamp pattern can be adjusted using acontrol in each headlamp housing to avoiddazzling oncoming motorists.

The correct pattern will also better illuminatethe verge.

Halogen headlamps

G021421

Left-hand traffic.

Right-hand traffic.

Headlamps with Active Bending Lights

G021422

Left-hand traffic.

Right-hand traffic.

WARNING

On cars with Xenon headlamps, thereplacement of Xenon lamps must be car-ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvoworkshop is recommended. Working withXenon lamps demands extreme cautionbecause the headlamp is equipped with ahigh voltage unit.


06

191


General.................................................................................................. 194Tyre pressure........................................................................................ 198Warning triangle* and spare wheel * .................................................... 199Changing wheels................................................................................... 201Emergency puncture repair*................................................................. 203

WHEELS AND TYRES

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

194

Driving characteristics and tyres

The tyres greatly affect the car's driving cha-racteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyrepressure and speed rating are important forhow the car performs.

When changing tyres, ensure that tyres of thesame type and dimensions, and preferably alsothe same make, are fitted to all four wheels.Follow the recommended tyre pressuresspecified on the tyre pressure label, seepage 198.

Designation of dimensions

The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.Example: 205/55R16 91 W.

205 Tyre width (mm)

55 Ratio between tyre wall height andtyre width (%)

R Radial ply

16 Rim diameter in inches (")

91 Tyre load index (in this case 615 kg)

W Speed rating for maximum permittedspeed (in this case 270 km/h).

Speed ratings

The car is approved as a whole, which meansthat dimensions and speed ratings must notdiffer from those specified on the vehicle reg-istration document. The only exception tothese conditions is winter tyres (both thosewith metal studs and those without). If such atyre is chosen, the car must not be driven fasterthan the speed rating of the tyre (for example,class Q can be driven at a maximum of160 km/h).

Remember that traffic regulations determinehow fast a car can be driven, not the speedclass of the tyres.

Note! Maximum permitted speeds indicated.

Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)

T 190 km/h

H 210 km/h

V 240 km/h

W 270 km/h

Y 300 km/h

New tyres

Tyres are perishable. After a few years theybegin to harden at the same time as the frictioncapacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate.For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres aspossible when you replace them. This is espe-cially important with regard to winter tyres. Thelast four digits in the sequence mean the weekand year of manufacture. This is the tyre'sDOT marking (Department of Transportation),and this is stated with four digits, for example1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufac-tured in week 15 of 2010.

Tyre age

All tyres older than six years should be checkedby an expert even if they seem undamaged.

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

195

The reason for this is that tyres age and decom-pose, even if they are hardly ever or never used.The function can therefore be affected due tothe tyre's constituent materials being brokendown. In such a case the tyre should then notbe used. This also applies to spare tyres, wintertyres and tyres saved for future use. Examplesof external signs which indicate that the tyre isunsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.

The age of the tyre can be determined by theDOT marking, see previous illustration.

More even wear and maintenance

The correct tyre pressure results in more evenwear, see page 198. Driving style, tyre pres-sure, climate and road condition affect howquickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif-ferences in tread depth and to prevent wearpatterns arising, the front and rear wheels canbe switched with each other. A suitable dis-tance for the first change is approx. 5000 kmand then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recom-mends that you contact an authorised Volvoworkshop for checking if you are uncertainabout tread depth. If significant differences inwear (>1 mm difference in tread depth)between tyres have already occurred, the leastworn tyres must always be placed on the rear.Understeer is normally easier to correct thanoversteer, and leads to the car continuing for-

wards in a straight line rather than having therear end skidding to one side, resulting in pos-sible complete loss of control over the car. Thisis why it is important for the rear wheels neverto lose grip before the front wheels.

Wheels should be stored lying down or hangingup, and not standing up.

Tyres with tread wear indicators

G020323

Tread wear indicators.

Tread wear indicators are narrow treadlessbands across the width of the tread. On theside of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread WearIndicator). When the tyre's tread depth is downto 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in heightwith the tread wear indicators. Change to newtyres as soon as possible. Remember that

tyres with little tread depth provide very poorgrip in rain and snow.

Winter tyres

Volvo recommends winter tyres with specificwinter tyre dimensions. Tyre dimensions aredependent on engine variant. When driving onwinter tyres, they must be fitted to all fourwheels.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvodealer about which wheel rim and tyre typesare most suitable.

Studded tyres

Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for500-1000 km, so that the studs settle properlyinto the tyres. This gives the tyre, and espe-cially the studs, a longer service life.

NOTE

The legal provisions for the use of studdedtyres vary from country to country.

Tread depth

Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem-peratures place considerably higher demandson tyres than summer conditions. It is therefore

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

196

recommended not to drive on winter tyres thathave a tread depth of less than 4 mm.

Snow chains

Snow chains may only be used on the frontwheels. This also applies to all-wheel-drivecars.

Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snowchains. Avoid driving on bare ground as thiswears out both the snow chains and tyres.

WARNING

Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva-lent chains designed for the car model, andtyre and rim dimensions. In the event ofuncertainty Volvo recommends that youconsult an authorised Volvo workshop. Thewrong snow chains may cause seriousdamage to your car and lead to an accident.

Rims and wheel nuts

Only use wheel rims that are tested andapproved by Volvo and which are included inthe Volvo genuine accessories range.

Standard wheel nuts.

Bulge acorn wheel nuts.

There are two types of wheel nut, dependingon whether the wheel rims are made of steel oraluminium.

1. Tighten the wheel nuts of model (1) to 110Nm. Tighten the wheel nuts of model (2) to130 Nm.

2. Check the torque with a torque wrench.

IMPORTANT

The wheel nuts (1) should be tightened to110 Nm and (2) to 130 Nm respectively.Overtightening can damage the nuts andthe bolts.

Steel rims – standard wheel nuts (1)

Steel rims are normally mounted with thestandard wheel nuts, but the bulge acorn vari-ety may also be used.

WARNING

Never use standard nuts for aluminium rims.The wheel could come loose.

Aluminium rims – bulge acorn wheel nuts

(2)

Only use the bulge acorn variety of nuts withaluminium rims.

NOTE

These nuts may also be used with steel rims.

Locking wheel nuts

Locking wheel nuts can be used on both alu-minium and steel rims. If steel rims with lockingwheel nuts are used in combination with wheelcovers, the locking wheel nut should be moun-

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07


ted on the bolt nearest the air valve. Otherwisethe wheel cover cannot be fitted to the rim.

NOTE

Tighten the lockable wheel nuts to 110 Nm.

Spare wheel Temporary Spare*

The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is onlyintended for use temporarily and must bereplaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos-sible. The car's handling may be altered by theuse of the spare wheel. The spare wheel issmaller than the normal wheel. The car'sground clearance is affected accordingly. Payattention to high kerbs and do not machinewash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on thefront axle, you cannot use snow chains at thesame time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive onthe rear axle can be disconnected. The sparewheel must not be repaired. The correct tyrepressure for the spare wheel is stated in thetyre pressure table, see page 298.

IMPORTANT

Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a sparewheel on the car.

IMPORTANT

The car must never be driven fitted withmore than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.

Summer and winter wheels

G020325

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.

When summer and winter wheels are changed,see page 201, the wheels should be markedwith which side of the car they were mountedon, for example L for left and R for right. Tyreswith a tread pattern which are designed to onlyturn in one direction have the direction of rota-tion marked with an arrow.

The tyre must always rotate in the same direc-tion throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only

be switched between front and rear positions,never between left and right-hand sides, orvice versa.

If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the car'sbraking characteristics and capacity to forcerain, snow and slush out of the way areadversely affected.

Tyres with the greatest tread depth shouldalways be fitted to the rear of the car (todecrease the risk of skidding).

Volvo recommends that you contact an author-ised Volvo workshop for checking if you areuncertain about tread depth.

07 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure

07


Recommended tyre pressure

G007505

The tyre pressure label on the driver's side doorpillar shows which pressures the tyres shouldhave at different load and speed conditions.

• Tyre pressure for the car's recommendedtyre size

• ECO pressure1

• Spare tyre pressure (Temporary Spare).

Checking the tyre pressure

Check the tyre pressure regularly.

NOTE

Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is anatural phenomenon. Tyre pressure alsovaries depending on ambient temperature.

Even after several kilometres of driving, thetyres warm up and the pressure increases. Soair must not be released if the pressure ischecked when the tyres are warm. While thepressure must be increased if it is too low.

Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel con-sumption, shorten tyre lifespan and impair thecar's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyrepressure that is too low can also result in thetyres overheating and disintegrating.

For information on the correct tyre pressure,refer to the tyre pressure table. The specifiedtyre pressures refer to "cold tyres". ("Coldtyres" means the tyres are the same tempera-ture as the ambient temperature.)

Fuel economy, ECO pressure

At speeds under 160 km/h the general tyrepressure for maximum load is recommendedin order to obtain optimum fuel economy.

Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, roadnoise and steering characteristics.

DRIVe*

An important detail in connection with environ-mentally-conscious driving is to use the righttype of tyres and to drive with the correct airpressure inside them.

Dimensions

When fitting new tyres, the same type andbrand as the car was equipped with from thefactory are recommended - they are designedfor low fuel consumption.

The 195/65 R15 and 205/55 R16 dimensionsgenerally provide a slightly lower consumptionthan wider variants.

Pressure

Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel con-sumption. For this reason, check the pressurein the tyres regularly.

By using so-called ECO pressure2 fuel con-sumption is minimised. A certain impact on ridecomfort, road noise and steering characteris-tics may be experienced, but this does notaffect safety.

See the decal with the recommended tyrepressure adjacent to the driver's door pillar.

1 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.2 The pressure that is recommended for maximum load.

07 Wheels and tyres

Warning triangle* and spare wheel *

07


Warning triangle

Follow the regulations for the use of a warningtriangle*. Place the warning triangle in a suita-ble place with regard to the traffic.

1. Undo the case containing the warning tri-angle, it is secured with Velcro straps. Takethe warning triangle from the case.

2. Lower the warning triangle's support legs.

Ensure the warning triangle and its case arefirmly secured in the cargo area after use.

Spare wheel* and jack *

The car's original jack*

The original jack* must only be used for chang-ing wheels. The jack's thread should always bewell greased. The spare wheel* plus jack* andwheel wrench* are stored under the floor in thecargo area.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack* thatbelongs to the car model in question, whichis indicated on the jack's label.

The label also indicates the jack's maximumlift capacity at a specified minimum liftingheight.

Taking out the spare wheel

A bolt runs through to secure the spare wheel.

1. Fold up the cargo area floor.

2. Unscrew the retaining bolt and lift out thewheel.

07 Wheels and tyres

Warning triangle* and spare wheel *

07


Putting the spare wheel* and jack* into

the cargo area

Wheel wrench*.

Jack* and handle, secured with a tension-ing strap.

The spare wheel is bolted down with therim side down using the through-bolt.

Tools - returning into place

Tools and jack* must be returned into place inthe correct manner after use.

• For cars equipped with spare wheel, thejack must be cranked so that it fits into thespare wheel.

• For cars equipped with emergency punc-ture repair kit, the jack must be fullycranked together and returned into thefoam block.

IMPORTANT

The tools and jack* must be stored in theintended location in the car's cargo areawhen not in use.

First aid*

A case with first aid equipment is located in thecargo area.

07 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

07


Removing wheels

G020331

Set up the warning triangle if a wheel must bechanged at a busy location. Make sure that thecar and jack are on a firm horizontal surface.

WARNING

Check that the jack is not damaged, that thethreads are thoroughly lubricated and that itis free from dirt.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack* thatbelongs to the car model in question, whichis indicated on the jack's label.

The label also indicates the jack's maximumlift capacity at a specified minimum liftingheight.

1. Take out the spare wheel*, jack* and wheelwrench* that are located under the carpetin the cargo area. If another jack isselected, see page 219.

2. Apply the parking brake and engagereverse gear, or position P if the car has anautomatic gearbox.

3. Place chocks in front of and behind thewheels which will remain on the ground.Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.

4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheelcovers. Prize off the wheel cover with theend of the wheel wrench, or pull it off byhand.

5. Loosen the wheel nuts ½-1 turn anticlock-wise with the wheel wrench.

G020332

Telescopic wheel wrench.

WARNING

Never position anything between theground and the jack, nor between the jackand the car's jacking point.

6. There are two jacking points on each sideof the car. There is a recess in the plasticcover at each point. Crank the foot of thejack down so it is pressed squarely on theground. Check that the jack is seated cor-rectly in the intended jacking point, as illus-trated, and that the base is located directlyunder it.

07 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

07

202

IMPORTANT

The ground must be firm, smooth and level.

7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.Remove the wheel nuts and lift off thewheel.

Fitting the wheel

1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheeland hub.

2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts.

3. Lower the car so that the wheel cannotrotate.

4. Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It isimportant that the wheel nuts are tightenedproperly.

• Standard wheel nuts - tightening tor-que: 110 Nm

• Domed wheel nuts - tightening torque:130 Nm

Check the torque with a torque wrench.

5. Put on the wheel cover (steel rim).

WARNING

Never crawl under the car when it is raisedon the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it israised on the jack.

Ensure that passengers wait with the car -or preferably a crash barrier - between themand the road.

07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

07


Emergency puncture repair, generalinformation

The emergency puncture repair kit is used toseal a puncture as well as to check and adjustthe tyre pressure. It consists of a compressorand a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works asa temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottlemust be replaced before its expiration date andafter use.

The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc-tured in the tread.

NOTE

The emergency puncture repair kit is onlyintended for sealing tyres with a puncture inthe tread.

The emergency puncture repair kit has limitedcapacity to seal tyres which have punctures inthe wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergencypuncture repair kit if they have larger slits,cracks or similar damage.

12 V sockets for the compressor are located bythe centre console in the front and by the rearseat. Choose the electrical socket that is near-est the punctured tyre.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/hafter the emergency tyre repair kit has beenused. Volvo recommends that you visit anauthorised Volvo workshop for inspection ofthe sealed tyre (maximum driving distanceis 200 km). The staff there can determinewhether or not the tyre can be repaired or ifit needs to be replaced.

Taking out the emergency puncture

repair kit

The emergency puncture repair kit with com-pressor and tools are stored under the floor inthe cargo area.

1. Fold up the cargo area floor.

2. Unscrew the bolt and remove the holder.

3. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit.

Fitting the emergency puncture repair kit

1. Insert the emergency puncture repair kit.2. Align the holder in the inner and lower

grooves of the spare wheel well3. Screw in the bolt.

NOTE

Incorrect installation of the holder maycause the emergency puncture repair kit torattle.

07 Wheels and tyres


07


Overview

G020400

Decal, maximum permitted speed

Switch

Cable

Bottle holder (orange cap)

Protective cap

Pressure reducing valve

Air hose

Sealing fluid bottle

Pressure gauge

Sealing punctured tyres

G019723

For information on the function of the parts, seepreceding illustration.

1. Open the lid of the emergency puncturerepair kit.

2. Detach the decal for maximum permittedspeed and affix it to the steering wheel.

WARNING

The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In thecase of contact with skin, wash away thefluid with soap and water.

3. Check that the switch is in position 0 andlocate the cable and the air hose.

NOTE

Do not break the bottle's seal before use.The seal is broken automatically when thebottle is screwed in.

4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew thebottle's stopper.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equippedwith a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Screw the bottle into its holder.

6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screwin the air hose valve connection to the bot-tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car withoutsupervision when the engine is running.

7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket andstart the car.

07 Wheels and tyres


07


WARNING

Never stand next to the tyre when the com-pressor is running. If cracks or unevennessarise then the compressor must beswitched off immediately. The journeyshould not be continued. Contacting anauthorised tyre centre is recommended.

NOTE

When the compressor starts, the pressurecan increase up to 6 bar but the pressuredrops after approximately 30 seconds.

8. Flick the switch to position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor mustnot run for more than 10 minutes.

9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.

WARNING

If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the holein the tyre is too big. The journey should notbe continued. Contacting an authorised tyrecentre is recommended.

10. Switch off the compressor to check thepressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum

pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is3.5 bar.

11. Switch off the compressor and unplug thecable from the 12 V socket.

12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fitthe valve cap.

13. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so thatthe sealing fluid can seal the tyre.

Rechecking the repair and pressure

1. Reconnect the equipment.

2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressuregauge.

3. If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insuf-ficiently sealed. The journey should not becontinued. Contact a tyre centre.

4. If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar,the tyre must be inflated to the pressurespecified on the tyre pressure decal.Release air using the pressure reducingvalve if the tyre pressure is too high.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equippedwith a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Switch off the compressor. Detach the airhose and cable. Refit the dust cap.

NOTE

The sealing fluid bottle and the hose mustbe replaced after use. Volvo recommendsthat this replacement is performed by anauthorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure regularly.

6. Return the emergency puncture repair kitto the cargo area.

7. Volvo recommends that you drive to thenearest authorised Volvo workshop for thereplacement/repair of the damaged tyre.Advise the workshop that the tyre containssealing fluid.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/hafter the emergency tyre repair kit has beenused. Volvo recommends that you visit anauthorised Volvo workshop for inspection ofthe sealed tyre (maximum driving distanceis 200 km). The staff there can determinewhether or not the tyre can be repaired or ifit needs to be replaced.

07 Wheels and tyres


07


Inflating the tyres

The car's original tyres can be inflated by thecompressor.

1. The compressor must be switched off.Make sure that the switch is in position 0and locate the cable and air hose.

2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screwin the air hose valve connection to the bot-tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

WARNING

Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result indanger to life. Never leave the engine run-ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf-ficient ventilation.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car withoutsupervision when the engine is running.

3. Connect the cable to one of the car's12 V sockets and start the car.

4. Start the compressor by flicking the switchto position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor mustnot run for more than 10 minutes.

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified onthe tyre pressure decal. (Release air usingthe pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres-sure is too high.)

6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the airhose and cable.

7. Refit the dust cap.

Changing the sealing fluid canister

Replace the bottle before the expiration datehas passed. Treat the old bottle as environ-mentally hazardous waste.

WARNING

The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and naturalrubber-latex.

Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergicreaction in the event of skin contact.

Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.

Store out of the reach of children.

NOTE

Leave the container at a collection point forstoring dangerous waste.

07 Wheels and tyres

07

207

208

Cleaning................................................................................................ 210Touching up paintwork......................................................................... 214Rustproofing......................................................................................... 215

CAR CARE

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

210

Washing the car

Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. Usecar shampoo. Dirt and road salt can lead tocorrosion.

• Do not park the car in direct sunlight.Washing a car with hot paintwork cancause permanent paintwork damage.Wash the car in a car wash with wastewater separator.

• Hose down the underbody thoroughly.

• Wash using a sponge, car shampoo andplenty of lukewarm water.

• If the dirt is difficult to dislodge, wash thecar using a cold degreasing agent.

• Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois ora water scraper.

WARNING

Always have the engine cleaned by a work-shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine ishot.

IMPORTANT

Dirty headlamps have impaired functional-ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling forexample.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps, foglamps and rear lamps may temporarily havecondensation on the inside of the lens. Thisis a natural phenomenon, all outside lightingis designed to withstand this. Condensationis normally vented out of the lamp when ithas been switched on for a time.

Cleaning the wiper blades

Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades,as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen,impair the service life of wiper blades.

NOTE

Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg-ularly with lukewarm soap solution or carshampoo.

Do not use any strong solvents.

Removing bird droppings

Wash away bird droppings from the paintworkas soon as possible. Bird droppings containchemicals that affect and discolour paintworkvery quickly. This discoloration can only beremoved by a specialist.

Chromed wheels

IMPORTANT

Rim cleaning agents can cause stains onchrome-plated wheels. Wash using asponge, car shampoo and plenty of luke-warm water.

Automatic car washes

An automatic car wash is a simple and quickway of washing the car, but it can never replacea proper handwashing. The brushes of an auto-matic car wash cannot reach everywhere.

IMPORTANT

Washing by hand is gentler to the paintworkthan an automatic car wash. Paintwork isalso more sensitive when it is new. For thisreason, handwashing is recommended dur-ing the first few months with a new car.

High-pressure washing

When using high-pressure washing, usesweeping movements and make sure that thenozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to thesurface of the car (the distance applies to allexterior parts).

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

211

IMPORTANT

Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt.When using a pressure washer: Make surethat the nozzle of the pressure washer is notcloser than 30 cm to the bodywork. Do notspray directly onto the locks.

Testing the brakes

WARNING

Always test the brakes after washing thecar, including the parking brake, to ensurethat moisture and corrosion do not attackthe brake linings and reduce braking per-formance.

Lightly depress the brake pedal now and thenwhen driving long distances in rain or slush.This heats and dries the brake pads. Do thesame thing after starting in very damp or coldweather.

Exterior plastic, rubber and trim

components

A special cleaning agent available from Volvodealers is recommended for the cleaning andcare of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trimcomponents (such as glossy trim mouldings).When using such a cleaning agent the instruc-tions must be followed carefully.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic andrubber.

When using degreasant on plastic and rub-ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec-essary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wearaway or damage the glossy surface.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive mustnot be used.

Polishing and waxing

Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dullor to give the paintwork extra protection.

The car does not need to be polished until it isat least one year old. However, the car can bewaxed before this time. Do not polish or waxthe car in direct sunlight.

Wash and dry the car thoroughly before youbegin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphaltand tar stains using tar remover or white spirit.More stubborn stains can be removed usingfine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.

Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq-uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on thepackaging carefully. Many preparations con-tain both polish and wax.

IMPORTANT

Only paint treatment recommended byVolvo should be used. Other treatment suchas preserving, sealing, protection, lustresealing or similar could damage the paint-work. Paintwork damage caused by suchtreatments is not covered by Volvo war-ranty.

Cleaning the interior

Only use cleaning agents and car care prod-ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularlyand follow the instructions included with thecar care product.

Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaningagents.

Carpets and cargo area

Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning ofthe floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use avacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.

Each inlay mat is secured with pins.

– Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin andlift the mat straight up.

Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in ateach pin.

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

212

WARNING

Before setting off check that the inlaid matin the driver area is firmly affixed andsecured in the pins in order to avoid gettingcaught adjacent to and under the pedals.

A special textile cleaner is recommended forstains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floormats should be cleaned with agents recom-mended by your Volvo dealer!

Treatment of stains on textile upholstery

and headliner

A special fabric cleaning agent, available fromauthorised Volvo dealers, is recommended toavoid impairing the fire retardant qualities ofthe upholstery.

IMPORTANT

Sharp objects and Velcro may damage thefabric upholstery.

Treating stains on leather upholstery

Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-freeand is treated to preserve its original appear-ance.

Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau-tiful patina over time. The leather is refined andprocessed so that it retains its natural charac-teristics. It is given a protective coating, but

regular cleaning is required in order to maintainboth characteristics and appearance. Volvooffers a comprehensive product for the clean-ing and treatment of leather upholstery which,when used in accordance with the instructions,preserves the leather's protective coating.After a period of use the natural appearance ofthe leather will nevertheless emerge, depend-ing more or less on the surface texture of theleather. This is a natural maturing of the leatherand shows that it is a natural product.

To achieve best results Volvo recommendscleaning and the application of protectivecream once to four times per year (or more ifnecessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail-able from your Volvo dealer.

IMPORTANT

• Certain items of coloured clothing (forexample, jeans and suede garments)may stain the upholstery.

• Never use strong solvents. Such prod-ucts may damage fabric, vinyl andleather upholstery.

Washing instructions for leather

upholstery

1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampenedsponge and squeeze out a strong foam.

2. Work the dirt away with gentle circularmovements.

3. Dab accurately with the sponge on thestains. Allow the sponge to absorb thestain. Do not rub.

4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth andallow the leather to dry completely.

Protective treatment of leather

upholstery

Vacuuming is important prior to using leathercare agents.

1. Pour a small amount of the protectivecream on the felted cloth and massage ina thin layer of cream with gentle circularmovements on the leather.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutesbefore use.

The leather has now been given improved pro-tection against stains and improved UV pro-tection.

IMPORTANT

Sharp objects may damage the leather, (e.g.rings).

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

213

Washing instructions for the leather

steering wheel

• Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-mois-tened sponge and neutral soap.

• Leather needs to breathe. Never cover theleather steering wheel with protective plas-tic.

• Use natural oils. Volvo's leather careagents are recommended for best results.

If the steering wheel has stains:

Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat andblood)

– Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5%ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use asolution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)

Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)

1. Same procedure as group I.

2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.

Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)

1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.

2. Same procedure as group I.

Treating stains on interior plastic, metal

and wood parts

A special cleaning agent, available from Volvodealers, is recommended for cleaning interiorparts and surfaces. Do not scrape or rub stains.Never use strong stain removers.

Cleaning seatbelts

Use water and a synthetic detergent. A specialtextile cleaning agent is available from yourVolvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is drybefore allowing it to retract.

08 Car care

Touching up paintwork

08

214

Paintwork

Paint is an important part of the car's rust-proofing and should therefore be checked reg-ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damagedpaintwork should be rectified immediately. Themost common types of paintwork damage arestone chips, scratches, and marks on theedges of wings and doors.

Colour code

Data plate.

Code for car colour

It is important that the correct colour is used.For product decal location, see page 284.

Stone chips and scratches

G020345

Before touching up paintwork, the car must beclean and dry and at a temperature above15 °C.

Materials

• Primer in a can

• Spray can or touch-up pen1

• Masking tape.

Minor stone chips and scratches

If the stone chip has not penetrated to the baremetal and there is an undamaged colour coat,you can paint straight after cleaning the dam-aged area.

If the stone chip has penetrated to the

bare metal

1. Apply a piece of masking tape over thedamaged surface. Then remove the tape toremove any loose paint.

2. Stir the primer well and apply using a finebrush or a matchstick. Apply paint using abrush once the primer is dry.

3. For scratches, proceed as above, butmask around the damaged area to protectthe undamaged paintwork.

4. After a few days, polish the touched-upareas. Use a soft rag and a small amountof lapping paste.

1 Follow the instructions contained in the touch-up pen's packaging.

08 Car care

Rustproofing

08

215

Inspection and maintenance

Your car has already received a thorough andcomplete rustproofing at the factory. Parts ofthe body are made of galvanised sheet metal.The underbody is protected by a wear-resis-tant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, pene-trating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into themembers, cavities and closed sections.

Maintain the car's rustproofing.

• Keep the car clean. Hose down the under-body. If using a pressure washer, keep thenozzle at least 30 cm from the painted sur-faces.

• Regularly check and touch-up the rust-proofing treatment as necessary.

The car's rustproofing does not normallyrequire treatment for approximately 12 years.After this period, it should be treated at three-year intervals. If the car needs further treat-ment, Volvo recommends that you engage anauthorised Volvo workshop for assistance.

216

Volvo service......................................................................................... 218Self-maintenance.................................................................................. 219Bonnet and engine compartment......................................................... 220Oils and fluids....................................................................................... 222Wiper blades......................................................................................... 228Battery................................................................................................... 230Replacing bulbs.................................................................................... 234Fuses..................................................................................................... 240

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE


Volvo service 09

218

Volvo service programme

Before the car left the factory, it was thoroughlytest driven. It was checked again in accord-ance with Volvo Car Corporation regulationsbefore it was handed over to you.

To keep your Volvo as safe and reliable as pos-sible, follow the Volvo service programmespecified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.Volvo also recommends that you engage anauthorised Volvo workshop to perform theservice and maintenance work. Volvo work-shops have the personnel, special tools andservice literature to guarantee the highest qual-ity of service.

IMPORTANT

For the Volvo warranty to apply, check andfollow the instructions in the Service andWarranty Booklet.

Special service measures

Certain service measures which affect the car'selectrical system can only be performed usingelectronic equipment specially developed foryour car. For this reason, Volvo recommendsthat you always contact an authorised Volvoworkshop before beginning or performingservice work that affects the electrical system.


Self-maintenance 09

219

Before starting work on the car

Battery

Check that the battery cables are correctlyconnected and tightened.

Never disconnect the battery when the engineis running (e.g. if replacing the battery).

Never use a quick charger to charge the bat-tery. The battery cables must be disconnectedwhen charging the battery.

The battery contains acid that is both corrosiveand toxic. It is therefore important to handle thebattery in an environmentally correct manner.Let your Volvo dealer assist you.

WARNING

The ignition system has very high voltageand output. The voltage in the ignition sys-tem is highly dangerous. The ignition musttherefore always be switched off for work inthe engine compartment.

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coilswhen the ignition is on or the engine is hot.

Raising the car

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack thatbelongs to the car model in question. If ajack is selected other than the one recom-mended by Volvo, follow the instructions foruse supplied with the equipment.

If the car is raised with a workshop jack; posi-tion the jack against the front edge on the sub-frame.

Do not damage the splashguard under theengine. Ensure that the jack is positioned sothat the car cannot slide off the jack. Alwaysuse axle stands or similar.

If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshoplift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms arefixed under the lifting points. See precedingillustration.

Check regularly

Check the following at regular intervals, forexample, when refuelling:

• Coolant – The level must be between theMIN and MAX marks on the expansiontank.

• Engine oil – The level must be between theMIN and MAX marks.

• Power steering fluid – The level must bebetween the MIN and MAX marks.

• Washer fluid – The reservoir should be wellfilled. Fill washer fluid with antifreeze attemperatures around freezing point.

• Brake and clutch fluid – The level must bebetween the MIN and MAX marks.

WARNING

Remember that the radiator fan (located atthe front of the engine compartment, behindthe radiator) may start automatically someafter the engine has been switched off.

Always have the engine cleaned by a work-shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine ishot.


Bonnet and engine compartment 09

220

Opening the bonnet

The illustration shows a left-hand drive car.

1. Pull the handle on the far left under theinstrument panel. (In right-hand drive carsthe handle is on the far right.) You will hearwhen the catch releases.

2. Insert your hand under the centre of thefront edge of the bonnet and press thesafety catch to the right.

3. Open the bonnet.

WARNING

Check that the bonnet locks properly whenclosed.

Engine compartment

Washer fluid reservoir (4-cyl.)

Coolant expansion tank

Reservoir for the power steering fluid (con-cealed behind the headlamp)

Dipstick1 for engine oil2

Radiator

Radiator fan

Washer fluid reservoir (5-cyl.)

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-handdrive)

Filling the engine oil2

1 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).2 The location varies depending on engine alternative.


Bonnet and engine compartment 09

221

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-handdrive)

Battery

Relay and fuse box

Air filter2

2 The location varies depending on engine alternative.


Oils and fluids 09

222

Checking the engine oil

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

IMPORTANT

Always use oil of the prescribed grade.Check the oil level frequently and changethe oil regularly. The engine will be damagedif lower grade oil is used or if the car is drivenwith the oil level too low.

When driving under adverse conditions, seepage 290.

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for theengine's service intervals all engines arefilled with a specially adapted syntheticengine oil at the factory. The choice of oilhas been made very carefully with regard toservice life, starting characteristics, fuelconsumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used inorder that the recommended service inter-vals can be applied. Only use a prescribedgrade of oil for both filling and oil change,otherwise you will risk affecting service life,starting characteristics, fuel consumptionand environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribedgrade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

Volvo uses different systems for warning oflow/high oil level or low/high oil pressure. Cer-tain variants have an oil pressure sensor, andthen the lamp for oil pressure is used. Othervariants have an oil level sensor, and then thedriver is informed via the warning symbol in thecentre of the instrument unit as well as by dis-play texts. Certain models have both variants.Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.

Change the engine oil and oil filter in accord-ance with the intervals specified in the Serviceand Warranty Booklet.

Using oil of a higher than specified grade ispermitted. If the car is driven in adverse con-ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of ahigher grade, see page 290.

For capacities, see page 291 and onwards.

Engine with oil dipstick1

Petrol engine.

Dipstick, petrol engines.

Filler pipe, engine oil.

1 Only applies to petrol and 4-cyl. diesel.


Oils and fluids 09

223

Diesel engine.

Dipstick, 4-cyl diesel engines.

Filler pipe, engine oil.

Checking the oil level in a new car is especiallyimportant before the first scheduled oil change.

Volvo recommends checking the oil level every2 500 km. The most accurate measurementsare made on a cold engine before starting. Themeasurement will be inaccurate if taken imme-diately after the engine is switched off. Thedipstick will indicate that the level is too lowbecause the oil has not had time to flow downinto the oil sump.

G020336

The oil level must be within the area marked on thedipstick.

Measurement and filling if required

1. Ensure that the car is level. After switchingoff the engine it is important to wait5 minutes to allow the oil time to run backto the sump.

2. Pull up and wipe the dipstick.

3. Re-insert the dipstick.

4. Pull it out and check the level.

5. If the level is close to MIN then 0.5 litresshould be added. If the level is significantly

below, then an additional amount isrequired.

6. If required, check the level again, do it afterdriving a short distance. Then repeat steps1 - 4.

WARNING

Never fill above the MAX mark. The levelshould never be above MAX or below MINas this could lead to engine damage.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifolddue to the risk of fire.


Oils and fluids 09

224

For engines with electronic oil level

sensor2

Filler pipe.3

You do not need to take action with respect tothe engine oil level before a message is shownin the display, see the illustration below.

Message and graph in the display.

Message

Engine oil level

The oil level is checked using the electronic oillevel gauge with the thumbwheel when theengine is switched off, see page 63.

WARNING

If the message Oil service required isshown, visit a workshop. The oil level maybe too high.

IMPORTANT

In the event of the message Oil level low,Fill oil, only fill with 0.5 litres.

NOTE

The oil level is only detected by the systemduring driving. The system cannot directlydetect changes when the oil is filled ordrained. The car must be drivenabout 30 km before the oil level display iscorrect.

WARNING

Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4)appears as shown in the illustration below.The level must never be above MAX orbelow MIN, as this could lead to enginedamage.

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifolddue to the risk of fire.

2 Only applies to 5-cyl. diesel.3 Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).


Oils and fluids 09

225

Measuring the oil level

If the oil level needs to be checked then itshould be carried out in accordance with thesequence below.

1. Activate key position II, see page 152.

2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-handstalk switch to position Engine oil level

Please wait....> You will then see information displayed

about the engine oil level.

The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fillmore oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recom-mended filling level is 4.

Washer fluid, topping up

The windscreen and headlamp washers sharea common reservoir.

For capacities, see the table Fluids on page293.

Filler cap on 4-cylinder engines and diesel.

Filler cap on 5-cylinder engines.

Add washer fluid with antifreeze in the winterso that the fluid does not freeze in the pump,reservoir and hoses.

NOTE

Mix concentrated washer fluid with waterbefore filling.

TIP! Clean the wiper blades when topping upwasher fluid.

Checking and topping up the coolant

When topping up the coolant, follow theinstructions on the packaging. It is importantthat the mixture of coolant concentrate andwater is correct for the prevailing weather con-ditions. Never top up with water only. The riskof freezing increases with both too little and toomuch coolant concentrate.


Oils and fluids 09

226

IMPORTANT

• A high content of chlorine, chloridesand other salts may cause corrosion inthe cooling system.

• Always use coolant with anti-corrosionagent as recommended by Volvo.

• Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%water and 50% coolant.

• Mix the coolant with approved qualitytap water. In the event of any doubtabout water quality, used ready-mixedcoolant in accordance with Volvo rec-ommendations.

• When changing coolant/replacing cool-ing system components, flush the cool-ing system clean with approved qualitytap water or flush with ready-mixedcoolant.

• The engine must only be run with a well-filled cooling system. Otherwise, tem-peratures that are too high may occurresulting in the risk of damage (cracks)in the cylinder head.

For capacities and for standards regardingwater quality, see page 293.

Check the coolant regularly

The level must lie between the MIN and MAX

marks on the expansion tank. If the system isnot filled sufficiently, high local temperaturescould occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks)to the cylinder head. Top up the coolant whenthe level falls to the MIN mark.

WARNING

Coolant can be very hot. If the coolantrequires topping up when the engine is atoperating temperature, unscrew the expan-sion tank cap slowly to gently release theoverpressure.

NOTE

The engine must only be run with a well-filled cooling system. Otherwise, tempera-tures that are too high may occur resultingin the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinderhead.

Checking and topping up the brake andclutch fluid

Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser-voir4. The fluid level must be between theMIN and MAX marks. Check the level regularly.Change the brake fluid every other year or atevery other regular service.

For capacities and recommended fluid grade,see the table Fluids on page 293.

The fluid should be changed annually on carsdriven in conditions requiring hard, frequentbraking, such as driving in mountains or tropi-cal climates with high humidity.

4 Location dependent on whether car is left or right-hand drive.


Oils and fluids 09

227

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in thebrake fluid reservoir, do not drive furtherbefore topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid mustbe investigated.

Checking and topping up the powersteering fluid

NOTE

Check the level frequently.

The fluid does not require changing. Forcapacities and recommended fluid grade, seepage 293.

If a fault should arise in the power steering sys-tem or if the car is without power and must betowed, it can still be steered. However, thesteering will be much heavier than normal andit will require more effort to turn the steeringwheel.


Wiper blades 09

228

Wiper blades

G020330

NOTE

The wiper blades are different lengths. Theblade on the driver's side is longer than onthe other side.

Cleaning

For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, seepage 210.

IMPORTANT

Check the wiper blades regularly.Neglected maintenance shortens the serv-ice life of the wiper blades.

Replacing the wiper blades, windscreen 1. Lift up the wiper arm.

2. Press the button located on the wiperblade mounting and pull straight out (1),parallel with the wiper arm.

3. Slide in (2) the new wiper blade until a"click" is heard.> Check (3) that the blade is firmly instal-

led and fold down the wiper arm.

Changing the rear window wiper blade

G007444

1. Fold out the wiper arm.

2. Detach the wiper blade by pulling ittowards the rear window.

3. Press the new wiper blade into position.


Wiper blades 09

229

> Check that it is firmly installed and foldback the wiper arm.


Battery 09

230

Operation

The service life and function of the battery isinfluenced by factors such as the number ofstarts, discharging, driving style, driving con-ditions and climatic conditions.

• Never disconnect the battery when theengine is running.

• Check that the cables to the battery arecorrectly connected and properly tight-ened.

WARNING

• The battery can generate oxyhydrogengas, which is highly explosive. A sparkcan be formed if a jump lead is con-nected incorrectly, and this can beenough for the battery to explode.

• The battery contains sulphuric acid,which can cause serious burns.

• If sulphuric acid comes into contactwith eyes, skin or clothing, flush withlarge quantities of water. If acidsplashes into the eyes - seek medicalattention immediately.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if itbecomes discharged repeatedly.

The life of the battery is affected by severalfactors, including driving conditions and cli-mate. Battery starting capacity decreasesgradually with time and therefore needs tobe recharged if the car is not used for alonger time or when it is only driven shortdistances. Extreme cold further limits star-ting capacity.

To maintain the battery in good condition, atleast 15 minutes of driving/week is recom-mended or that the battery is connected toa battery charger with automatic tricklecharging.

A battery that is kept fully charged has amaximum service life.

Symbols on the battery

Use protective goggles.

Further information in theowner's manual.

Store the battery out ofthe reach of children.

The battery contains cor-rosive acid.


Battery 09


Avoid sparks and nakedflames.

Risk of explosion.

Must be taken for recy-cling.

NOTE

An expended battery must be recycled in anenvironmentally correct manner as it con-tains lead.

Changing the battery

Removal

1. Remove the remote control key from theignition switch.

2. Wait at least 5 minutes before touching anyelectrical terminals.> The car's electrical system needs to

store the necessary information to thecontrol modules.

3. Remove the cover.

4. Detach the black negative cable.

WARNING

Connect and remove the positive and neg-ative cables in the correct order.

5. Detach the red positive cable.

6. Undo the front wall of the battery box usinga screwdriver.

7. Detach the ventilation hose from the bat-tery.

8. Release the clamp securing the battery.

9. Remove the battery.

Fitting

1. Fit the battery into position.

2. Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.

3. Connect the ventilation hose.> Check that it is correctly connected to

both battery and outlet in the body.

4. Reinstall the front wall of the battery box.

5. Connect the red positive cable.

6. Connect the black negative cable.

7. Attach the cover to the battery.

For more information on the car's battery - seepages 180 and 300.

DRIVe Start/Stop*

Cars with the Start/Stop function are equippedwith two 12 V batteries - one extra powerfulbattery for starting and one standby batterythat helps during the Start/Stop function's star-ting sequence.

For more information on Start/Stop - seepage 163.


Battery 09

232

Battery Start Standby

Cold startcapacityA,CCA (A)

760 120

Dimen-sionsB,L×W×H(mm)

278×175×190

150×90×106

Capacity(Ah)

70 8

A In accordance with the SAE standard.B Largest possible size.

NOTE

• The higher the current take-off in the car(extra cooling/heating, etc.) the morethe batteries must be charged =increased fuel consumption.

• When the capacity of the battery hasfallen below the lowest permissible levelthen the Start/Stop function is disen-gaged.

Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function dueto high current take-off means:

• The engine auto-starts1 without the driverdepressing the clutch pedal.

Location of the batteries

1. Battery2 2. Standby battery.

The standby battery normally requires no moreservice than the normal battery that is used forstarting. A workshop should be contacted inthe event of questions or problems - an author-ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

IMPORTANT

If the following instruction is not observedthen the Start/Stop function may temporar-ily cease to work after the connection of anexternal battery or battery charger:

• The negative battery terminal on thecar's main battery must never be usedfor connecting an external battery orbattery charger - only the car chassis

may be used as the grounding point.See the section "Start assistance" - for adescription of how the cable clamps mustbe attached.

1 Auto-start can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.2 The battery is described in detail on page 230.


Battery 09

233

NOTE

If the battery has become so dischargedthat everything is "black" and in principlethe car does not have all the normal electri-cal functions and the engine is subsequentlystarted using an external battery or batterycharger, then the Start/Stop function will beactivated. It will then be possible for theengine to be auto-stopped but in the eventof an auto-stop the Start/Stop function mayfail to auto-start the engine due to inade-quate capacity in the battery.

The battery must first be charged in order toensure a successful auto-start after an auto-stop. At an outside temperature of +15 °Cthe battery needs to be charged for at least1 hour. At a lower outside temperature acharging time of 3-4 hours is recom-mended. The recommendation is that thebattery is charged using an external batterycharger.

If this is not possible then the recommen-dation is to temporarily deactivate theStart/Stop function until the battery hasbeen adequately recharged.

For more information about recharging thebattery, see the section "Battery" in thechapter "Maintenance and service".


Replacing bulbs 09

234

General

All bulb specifications are given on page 300.

The following list contains locations of bulbsand other light sources that are specialised orunsuitable for changing except at a workshop:

• Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenonlamps)

• Daytime running lights (DRL) in the spoiler

• Direction indicators, door mirror andapproach lighting

• Reading lamps, courtesy lighting and glo-vebox lighting

• General interior lighting in the roof

• Brake light

WARNING

On cars with Xenon headlamps, thereplacement of Xenon lamps must be car-ried out at a workshop - an authorised Volvoworkshop is recommended. Working withXenon lamps demands extreme cautionbecause the headlamp is equipped with ahigh voltage unit.

IMPORTANT

Never touch the glass part of the bulbs withyour fingers. Grease and oil from your fin-gers are vaporised by the heat, coating thereflector and then causing damage.

Changing front bulbs

All front bulbs (except for fog lamps) arechanged by first removing the lamp housingfrom the engine compartment.

Removing the lamp housing

1. Remove the remote control key and turnthe light switch to position 0.

2. Withdraw the lamp housing's locking pin.

IMPORTANT

Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con-nector.

3. Pull the lamp housing to the side and thenforward.

4. Unplug the connector by pressing downthe clip with a thumb while moving out theconnector with the other hand.

5. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on asoft surface to avoid scratching the lens.

Fitting the lamp housing

1. Plug in the connector and refit the lamphousing and locking pin. Check that the pinis correctly inserted.

2. Check the lighting.

The lamp housing must be plugged in andsecured in place before the lighting is switched


Replacing bulbs 09

��

235

on or the remote control key inserted into theignition switch.

Dipped beam

Removing the cover and bulb

1. Remove the entire lamp housing.

2. Bend aside the catches and remove thecover.

3. Release the spring clip securing the bulb.First, press it to the left to release it, thenout and down.

4. Pull out the bulb.

Fitting a new bulb

1. Fit the new bulb. It can only fit in one posi-tion.

2. Press the spring clip in/up and then slightlyto the right in order to snap it into position.

3. Press the connector back on.

4. Refit the plastic cover.

5. Refit the lamp housing, see page 234.

Main beam

1. Remove the entire lamp housing.

2. Left-hand headlamp:

turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.

Right-hand headlamp:

turn the bulb holder clockwise.

3. Withdraw the bulb holder and change thebulb.

4. Refit the bulb holder. It can only be refittedin one position.

5. Refit the lamp housing.


Replacing bulbs 09

236


1. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise andwithdraw it. Replace the bulb.

2. Refit the bulb holder. It can only be refittedin one position.


1. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise andremove it.

2. To remove the bulb from the bulb holder,press the bulb in and turn it anticlockwise.

3. Fit a new bulb and refit the bulb holder intothe lamp housing.

Side marker lamps

1. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise andwithdraw it. Replace the bulb.

2. Refit the bulb holder. It can only fit in oneposition.


Replacing bulbs 09

237

Front fog lamps

1. Switch off all lights and turn the remotecontrol key to position 0.

2. Pull the cover straight out in the directionof the centre of the car using a tool, see theillustration above.> (Loosen the clips (1) and pull straight out

(2).)

3. Remove the screw securing the lamphousing and take out the lamp housing.

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

5. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and pull it out.

6. Fit the new bulb and turn it clockwise.

7. Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on thebulb holder must always be upward.

8. Secure the lamp housing with the screwand press the panel back into place.

Removing the bulb holder

All bulbs in the rear lamp cluster are replacedfrom inside the cargo area.


2. Remove the cover (A or B) in the left/right-hand panel to access the bulbs.

3. The bulbs are located in separate bulbholders.

4. Unplug the connector from the bulb holder.

5. Press the catches together and pull out thebulb holder.

6. Replace the bulb.

7. Plug in the connector.

8. Press the bulb holder into place and refitthe cover (A or B).

NOTE

If an error message remains after the brokenbulb has been replaced then we recom-mend that you visit an authorised Volvoworkshop.


Replacing bulbs 09

238

Location of bulbs in the rear bulbholder

Brake light

Position/parking and rear fog lamps


Reversing lamp



NOTE

The rear fog lamp only illuminates in the leftrear light cluster on a left-hand drive car andin the right on a right-hand drive.

Number plate lighting


2. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

3. Detach the lens carefully.

4. Replace the bulb.

5. Refit and screw in the lens.

Cargo area

G007613

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so thatthe lamp housing comes loose.

2. Remove the blown bulb.

3. Fit a new bulb.


Replacing bulbs 09


Passenger compartment lighting in

cargo area

G010326

Cargo area lighting also includes a further lampon the left-hand side of the cargo area.

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so thatthe lens detaches.

2. Unplug the connector from the bulb holder.

Vanity mirror lighting*

G020253

Removing the mirror glass

1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the loweredge, in the centre. Carefully prize up thelug on the edge.

2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edgeon the left and right-hand sides (by theblack rubber sections), and prize carefullyso that the glass comes loose in the loweredge.

3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entiremirror glass and cover.

4. Remove the blown bulb and replace it witha new one.

Fitting the mirror glass

1. First, press the three lugs at top edge ofmirror glass back into position.

2. Then press the three lower lugs back intoposition.


Fuses 09

240

General

All electrical functions and components arefused to protect the car's electrical systemfrom damage by short circuiting and overload-ing.

The fuses are in two different locations in thecar:

• Relay/Fuse box in the engine compart-ment.

• Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compart-ment.

Changing

If an electrical component or function does notwork, it may be because the component's fusewas temporarily overloaded and blew.

1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and check from the sideto see whether the curved wire has blown.

3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuseof the same colour and amperage.

Each fuse box has space for several sparefuses. If the same fuse fails repeatedly thenthere is a fault in the component. In which case,Volvo recommends that you visit an authorisedVolvo workshop for this to be checked.

WARNING

Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with anamperage higher than that specified whenreplacing a fuse. This could cause signifi-cant damage to the electrical system andpossibly lead to fire.


Fuses 09

��

241

Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment

G007446

The fuse box has 36 fuse positions. Be sure toreplace a blown fuse with a new fuse of thesame colour and amperage.

• Fuses 19-36 are of the "Mini Fuse" type.

• Fuses 7-18 are of the "JCASE" type andshould be replaced by a workshop.1

• Fuses 1-6 are of the "Midi Fuse" type andmust only be replaced by a workshop.1

On the inside of the cover there are tweezersthat facilitate the procedure for the removaland fitting of fuses.



Fuses 09


G020250

1. Cooling fan 50 A

2. Power steering 80 A

3. Supply to passenger compart-ment fuse box 60 A


5. PTC element, air preheater* 80 A

6. Glow plugs (DRIVe) 60 A

Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel) 70 A

7. ABS pump 40 A

8. ABS valves 20 A

9. Engine functions 30 A

10. Ventilation fan 40 A

11. Headlamp washers 20 A

12. Heated rear window 30 A

13. Actuator solenoid, startermotor 30 A

14. Trailer wiring* 40 A

15. Reserve –

16. Infotainment system 30 A

17. Windscreen wipers 30 A


19. Reserve –

20. Horn 15 A

21. Fuel-driven additional heater,passenger compartmentheater* 20 A

22. Reserve –


Fuses 09

��


23. Engine control module (5-cyl.petrol), Transmission controlmodule (5-cyl.) 10 A

Transmission control module(4-cyl.) 15 A

24. Heated fuel filter (5-cyl. diesel),PTC element, oil trap (5-cyl.diesel) 20 A

25. Central electronic module(CEM) (Start/Stop) 10 A

26. Ignition switch 15 A

27. A/C compressor 10 A

28. Reserve –

29. Front fog lamps

Daytime running lights (DRL)* 15 A

30. Coolant pump (Start/Stop) 10 A

31. Voltage regulator, alternator(4-cyl. petrol) 10 A

32. Injectors (5-cyl. petrol), Turbocontrol valve (5-cyl. diesel), Oillevel sensor (5-cyl. diesel)

Control valve, fuel flow(DRIVe), Mass air flow sensor(DRIVe), Control motor turbo(DRIVe) 10 A

33. Vacuum pump (5-cyl. petrol),Relay coil, relay, vacuumpump (5-cyl. petrol), Enginecontrol module (5-cyl. diesel),Heated fuel filter (DRIVe) 20 A

34. Ignition coils (petrol), Pressureswitch, climate control system(5-cyl.), Control module, glowplugs (5-cyl. diesel), EGRemission control (5-cyl. diesel),Fuel pump (DRIVe), Lambda-sond (DRIVe), Engine controlmodule (Start/Stop), Relaycoils, relays Start/Stop 10 A

35. Relay coil, relay, climate con-trol system, PTC element, oiltrap (5-cyl. petrol), Mass airflow sensor (5-cyl. petrol),Turbo control valve (5-cyl. pet-rol), Solenoids, variable valvetiming (5-cyl. petrol), Injectors(2.0 l petrol), EVAP valve (2.0 lpetrol), Valve, air/fuel mixture(2.0 l petrol), Control valve, fuelpressure (5-cyl. diesel), Enginecontrol module (5-cyl. diesel),Engine EGR (DRIVe) 15 A

36. Engine control module (petrol,DRIVe), Accelerator pedalposition sensor (5-cyl. diesel),Lambda-sond (5-cyl. diesel) 10 A


Fuses 09


DRIVe Start/Stop*

Location of fuses for the Start/Stop function.

No. Component A

11M/1 Engine compartment,electrical distributionunit

125

11M/2 Sensor, battery monitor-ing

15

25 Central electronic mod-ule (CEM) (Referencevoltage standby bat-tery), diesel engine

10

For more information on DRIVe Start/Stop -see page 163.


Fuses 09

245

Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compartment

G020601

The fuse box has 50 fuse positions. The fusesare located under the glovebox. The box alsoprovides space for several spare fuses. Toolsfor fuse replacement are located in the relay/fuse box in the engine compartment, seepage 241.

Replacing fuses

1. Remove the trim concealing the fuse boxby pressing in the pin in the centre of theclips (1) about one cm and then withdraw-ing the clips.

2. Turn the two wing screws (that secure thefuse box) (2) anticlockwise and removethem.

3. Lower the fuse box (3) half way. Pull ittowards the seat until it stops. Lower it

completely. The fuse box can be fullyunhooked.

4. Close the fuse box in the reverse order.

5. Remove the pins from the centre of theclips. Fit the trim and the clips. Reinsert thepins into the clips. This expands the clipsand secures the trim.


Fuses 09


43. Telematics*, Audio system,RTI*, Bluetooth* 15 A

44. SRS system, Engine controlmodule (5-cyl, DRIVe) 10 A

45. Electrical socket, passengercompartment 15 A

46. Passenger compartment, glo-vebox and courtesy lighting 5 A

47. Interior lighting, Remote con-trolled garage door opener* 5 A

48. Washer, rear window 15 A

49. SRS system 10 A

50. Reserve –

51. PTC element, air preheater*,Relay coil, relay, heated fuelfilter (5-cyl. diesel) 10 A

52. Transmission control module,ABS system 5 A

53. Power steering 10 A

54. Parking assistance*, Xenon* 10 A

55. Control module Keyless* 20 A

56. Remote control receiver,Siren* 10 A

57. Data link connector (DLC),brake light switch 15 A

58. Main beam, right, Relay coil,relay, auxiliary lamps* 7.5 A

59. Main beam, left 7.5 A

60. Seat heating (driver's side) 15 A

61. Seat heating (passenger side) 15 A

62. Sunroof* 20 A


Fuses 09


63. Reserve –

64. Reserve –

65. Audio, Infotainment 5 A

66. Audio, Infotainment, Climatecontrol system 10 A

67. Reserve –

68. Cruise control 5 A

69. Climate control system, Rainsensor, Buttons for BLIS*,parking assistance*, DRIVe 5 A

70. Reserve –

71. Reserve –

72. Reserve –

73. Sunroof*, Overhead consolefor interior lighting, Seatbeltreminder, rear, Dimming, inte-rior rearview mirror* 5 A

74. Fuel pump 15 A

75. Reserve –

76. Reserve –

77. Reserve –

78. Reserve –

79. Reversing lamp, Dimming,interior rearview mirror (signal) 5 A

80. Reserve -

81. Reserve –

82. Supply to front right door 25 A

83. Supply to front left door 25 A

84. Power seat, passenger 25 A

85. Power seat, driver 25 A

86. Interior lighting, cargo arealighting, power seats, fuellevel display (2.0F) 5 A


General.................................................................................................. 250Audio functions..................................................................................... 252Radio functions..................................................................................... 257CD functions......................................................................................... 262Menu structure – audio system............................................................. 265Phone functions*................................................................................... 266Menu structure – phone*....................................................................... 273Bluetooth handsfree*............................................................................ 276

INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM


General

10


Infotainment system

G020245

POWER - Pushbutton, audio system on/off

Display

Keypad

MENU - Goes to the menu system

Navigation buttons

EXIT - Exits the menu system

ENTER - Selects/activates/deactivates

Infotainment is a system that integrates theaudio system and phone*. The infotainment

system can be easily operated using the con-trol panel or the steering wheel keypad*, seepage 70. The display (2) shows messages andinformation on the current function.

Audio system

On/Off

POWER (1) starts/switches off the audio sys-tem. If the audio system is active when theremote control key is turned to position 0 thenit continues to be active until the remote controlkey is removed from the ignition switch. Theaudio system is started automatically the nexttime the remote control key is turned to posi-tion I.

Menus

Some infotainment system functions are con-trolled via a menu system. The current menulevel is shown at the top right of the display.Menu options are shown in the middle of thedisplay.

• MENU (4) leads to the menu system.

• Up/down with the navigation button (5)moves between menu options.

• ENTER (7) selects/activates/deactivatesone of the menu options.

• EXIT (6) leads back one step in the menustructure. A long press on EXIT will exit themenu system.

Shortcuts

Menu options are numbered and can also beselected directly with the keypad (3). So firstpress MENU and then the figure/figures for thedesired menu option.

Equipment

The audio system can be equipped with differ-ent options and different versions. There arethree audio system versions:

• Performance,

• High Performance* or

• Premuim Sound*

However, FM radio with RDS, AM radio and CDplayer are included in all audio systems.


General

10

251

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II 1

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II distributes thetwo stereo audio channels to left, centre, rightand rear speakers. This provides a more real-istic sound quality than that provided by stand-ard two-channel stereo.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the Dolbyicon are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System is manu-factured under license from Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

1 Premium Sound.


Audio functions

10


Audio controls

VOLUME - Knob

AM/FM – Audio source selection

MODE - Audio source selection, CD, AUX,USB (e.g. iPod )1 and BT*

TUNING - Knob

SOUND - Button

Navigation button - Menus

Volume

Use VOLUME (1) or the steering wheel keypadto regulate the volume, see page 70. Audio vol-

ume adjusts automatically depending on vehi-cle speed, see page 255.

Audio source selection

Repeatedly pressing AM/FM switchesbetween FM1, FM2 and AM.

Repeatedly pressing MODE changes betweenCD, USB, AUX and BT.

External audio sources

AUX, USB*

General

AUX input

USB input*

The AUX and USB inputs enable the connec-tion of an external audio source, e.g. aniPod 1 or MP3 player.

If you choose to connect an iPod , MP3 playeror a USB memory stick to the USB connectionthen you can control the media via the car'saudio controls.

1 USB only applies for High Performance and Premium Sound. The iPod trademark belongs to Apple Computer Inc.


Audio functions

10

253

Use the MODE button to select the externalaudio source you wish to use.

1. If USB is selected then Connect device isshown in the display.

2. Connect your iPod , MP3 player or USBmemory stick to the USB connection in thecentre console's storage compartment(see preceding illustration).> The text Loading appears on the dis-

play when the system loads the filestructure on the storage media. Thistakes a while.

When the loading is finished the track informa-tion is shown on the display and it is possibleto select the track required.

Track selection can take place in the followingthree ways:

• Select TUNING (4) clockwise or anticlock-wise.

• Use the right or left-hand button (6) of thenavigation control to scroll to the desiredtrack.

• With the steering wheel keypad.

In USB or iPod mode the infotainment systemoperates in an equivalent way to theCD player for playing back music files. Formore information, see page 262.

NOTE

The system supports the playback of musicfiles in the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats.However, there are variants of these file for-mats that are not supported by the system.The system also supports most iPod mod-els produced in 2005 or later. iPod Shuffleis not supported.

USB memory

To facilitate the use of USB memory avoid stor-ing any files other than music files in the mem-ory. It takes considerably longer for the systemto load storage media that contains items otherthan playable music files.

NOTE

The system supports removable mediawhich is compatible with USB 2.0 and theFAT32 file system, and can handle a maxi-mum of 500 folders and 64 000 files. Thememory must have a capacity of at least 256Mb.

MP3 player

Many MP3 players have their own file systemsthat are not supported by the audio system. Foruse in the system, an MP3 player must be setin USB Removable device/Mass Storage

Device mode.

iPod

An iPod is charged and supplied with powerby the USB connection via the player's con-nection cable. However, if the player's batteryis completely discharged then it must becharged before the player is connected.

NOTE

When an iPod is used as audio source, thecar's infotainment system has a menustructure that is similar to the iPod player'sown menu structure.

AUX

Sometimes the AUX external audio source canbe heard at a different volume to the internalaudio sources, e.g. the CD player. If the audiovolume of the external audio source is too highthen the sound quality can be impaired. Pre-vent this by adjusting the input volume of theAUX input.

NOTE

The sound quality may be impaired if theplayer is charged while the audio system isin AUX mode, so avoid charging the player.


Audio functions

10


Streaming audio via Bluetooth *

General

If the car is equipped with Bluetooth hands-free* and a mobile phone is connected then theaudio system can wirelessly play back stream-ing audio files from the mobile phone. Naviga-tion and control of the sound can be carried outvia the centre console buttons or via the steer-ing wheel keypad*. In some mobile phones it isalso possible to change tracks from the phone.

To be able to play back the audio a device mustfirst be paired and connected to the car. Forinformation about pairing and connection, seepage 276. BT must also be selected as audiosource, see page 252.

NOTE

The Bluetooth mobile phone must supportthe Audio/Video Remote Control Profile(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio DistributionProfile (A2DP). The phone should useAVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwisesome functions may not work.

NOTE

Not all mobile phones available in the mar-ket are fully compatible with theBluetooth function in the car's audio sys-tem. Volvo recommends that you contact anauthorised Volvo dealer or visitwww.volvocars.com for information oncompatible phones and external mediaplayers.

Playback

Press the MODE button repeatedly in order toselect BT as audio source.

Audio file selection can take place in the fol-lowing three ways:

• Select TUNING (4) clockwise or anticlock-wise.

• Use the or button (6) of the naviga-tion control to scroll to the desired audiofile.

• With the or buttons on the steeringwheel keypad.

Audio settings

Adjusting audio settings

Press SOUND (5) repeatedly to browse amongthe following options. Adjust by turningTUNING.

• BASS - Bass level.

• TREBLE - Treble level.

• FADER – Balance between the front andrear speakers.

• BALANCE – Balance between the left andright-hand speakers.

• CENTRE2 - Level for centre speaker.Three channel stereo or Pro Logic II mustbe activated before adjustment is possible,see under the heading Activating/deacti-vating surround sound below.

• SURROUND2 - Level for surround. ProLogic II must be activated before adjust-ment is possible, see under the headingAudio settings below.

2 Premium Sound.


Audio functions

10

��

255

Surround2

Surround settings govern the spatialperception of the sound. Settingsand activating/deactivating are sep-arate for each audio source.

G021216

The Dolby icon in the display indicates thatDolby Pro Logic II is active. There are threedifferent settings for surround sound:

• Dolby Pro Logic II

• 3 channel

• Off - 2 channel stereo.

Activating/deactivating surround sound

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Audio settings… and pressENTER.

3. Scroll to Surround FM…, Surround

AM…, Surround CD…or Surround

AUX… and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Dolby Pro Logic II3, 3 channel

or Off and press ENTER.

Equalizer front/rear4

The equalizer can be used to adjust differentfrequency bands separately.

Adjusting equalizer



3. Scroll to Equalizer front… or Equalizer

rear… and press ENTER.

4. The graphic on the display indicates theaudio level of the frequency in question.

5. Adjust the level with TUNING (4) or up/down with the navigation button. Addi-tional frequencies can be selected usingthe left/right navigation button.

6. Save with ENTER or EXIT to exit withoutsaving the settings.

Automatic volume control5

The auto volume control function allows theaudio volume to increase as the speed of thecar increases. There are three levels to choosefrom: Low, Medium and High.

Adjusting automatic volume control



3. Scroll to Auto. volume control… andpress ENTER.

4. Scroll to Low, Medium or High and pressENTER.

Optimum sound reproduction

The audio system is calibrated for optimumsound reproduction by means of digital signalprocessing.

This calibration takes into account loudspeak-ers, amplifiers, passenger compartmentacoustics, listener position etc. for each com-bination of car model and audio system.

2 Premium Sound.3 Not available in AM and FM mode.4 Certain audio systems.5 Not Performance


Audio functions

10


There is a also a dynamic calibration that takesinto account the position of the volume control,radio reception and vehicle speed.

The controls explained in these operatinginstructions, e.g. bass, treble and equalizer*are only intended for the user to be able toadapt the sound reproduction according topersonal taste.


Radio functions

10

��

257

Radio controls

G019806

FM/AM – Wavelength selection

Station presets

TUNING – Knob for station searches

SCAN – Scanning

Navigation button - Tuning and menus

EXIT - Cancel current function

AUTO – Automatic storage of stations

Tuning

Automatic tuning

1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).

2. Give a brief press on or .

The radio then automatically searches for thenext strong station.

Manual tuning


2. Adjust the frequency by turning TUNING

(3).

Tune into a station with a long press on or. Or by using the steering wheel keypad:

– Hold in or on the navigation buttondepressed until the desired frequencyappears on the display.

As long as the frequency graphic appears onthe display, searching can be resumed bybriefly pressing or .

Storing stations

Ten station presets can be stored per wave-length. FM has two memories for presets:FM1 and FM2. Preset stations are selectedusing the preset buttons (2) or the steeringwheel keypad.

Storing stations manually

1. Tune into a station.

2. Hold a station preset button depresseduntil the message Station stored appearson the display.

Automatic storage of stations

AUTO (7) seeks out the ten strongest radio sta-tions and stores them automatically in a sepa-rate memory. The function is especially usefulin areas where the radio stations and their fre-quencies are unfamiliar.

Starting automatic storage of stations


2. Hold AUTO (7) depressed untilAutostoring appears on the display.

Once Autostoring disappears from the dis-play, the stations are stored. The radio contin-ues in Auto mode and Auto appears on thedisplay. The automatically stored presets cannow be selected using the preset buttons (2).

Cancelling automatic storage of stations

– Press EXIT (6).


Radio functions

10

258

Selecting an auto-stored preset

Allowing the radio to remain in Auto mode pro-vides access to the autostored presets.

1. Briefly press AUTO (7).> Auto appears on the display.

2. Press a preset button (2).> The radio remains in Auto mode until it

is exited by a brief press on AUTO (7),EXIT (6) or AM/FM (1) cancels Automode.

Storing autostored presets in another

memory

An autostored preset can be transferred to theFM or AM memory.

1. Briefly press AUTO (7).> Auto appears on the display.

2. Press the preset button for the station youwant to move.

3. Press the button under which the stationwill be stored and hold it depressed untilthe message Station stored appears onthe display.> The radio exits Auto mode and the

stored station can be selected as a pre-set.

Scanning

SCAN (4) automatically searches through awavelength for strong stations. When a stationis found, it is played for approx. 8 secondsbefore scanning is resumed.

Activating/deactivating Scan

1. Select wavelength using AM/FM.

2. Press SCAN to activate.> SCAN appears on the display. Close

using SCAN or EXIT.

Storing a station

A selected station can be stored as a presetwhile SCAN is active.

– Press a station preset button and hold itdepressed until the message Station

stored appears on the display.> Scanning is interrupted and the stored

station can be selected as a preset.

RDS functions1

Radio Data System - RDS links FM transmittersinto a network. An FM transmitter in such anetwork sends information that gives anRDS radio the following functions:

• Automatically switches to a stronger trans-mitter if reception in the area is poor.

• Searches for programme form, such astraffic information or news.

• Receives text information on current radioprogramme.

Some radio stations do not use RDS or onlysome if its functionality.

Programme functions

In FM mode, the radio can search for stationswith certain programme types. If a requiredprogramme type is located the radio canswitch stations interrupting the audio sourcecurrently in use. For example, if the CD playeris in use, it is paused. The interrupting trans-mission is played at a preset audio volume, seepage 261. The radio returns to the previousaudio source and audio volume when the setprogramme type is no longer broadcast.

The programme functions alarm (ALARM!),traffic information (TP), news (News), and pro-

1 The RDS functions available vary in the different markets.


Radio functions

10

��

259

gramme types (PTY) interrupt one another inorder of priority, where alarm has the highestpriority and programme types has the lowest.

If you want to return to the interrupted audiosource before the message or programme typehas been completed, press EXIT.

For further programme interruption settings,see EON and REG see page 260. The pro-gramme functions are modified via the menusystem, see page 250.

Alarm

This function is used to warn of serious acci-dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot betemporarily interrupted or deactivated. Themessage ALARM! appears on the displaywhen an alarm message is transmitted.

Traffic information – TP

This function allows traffic informa-tion broadcast within a set station'sRDS network to break through. TP

shows that the function has beenactivated. If the set station can send trafficinformation then appears on the display.

G021220

Activating/deactivating TP


2. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.

TP from current station/all stations

The radio can interrupt with traffic informationfrom only the set (current) station or from allstations.

1. Select an FM station.


3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings… andpress ENTER.


5. Scroll to TP station… and press ENTER.> Either TP from current station or TP

from all stations is shown on the dis-play.

6. Press ENTER.

Activating/deactivating TP search

TP search is useful during long journeys whilean audio source other than the radio is beingplayed. The function automatically searchesfor traffic information within differentRDS networks.




4. Scroll to TP search and press ENTER.

News

This function allows news broad-casts within a set station'sRDS network to break through. Themessage News shows that the func-

tion is active.

G021221

Activating/deactivating News


2. Scroll to News and press ENTER.

News from current station/all stations

The radio can interrupt with news from only theset (current) station or from all stations.

1. Select an FM station.



4. Scroll to News station… and pressENTER.> Either News from current station or

News from all stations is shown on thedisplay.

5. Press ENTER.


Radio functions

10

260

Programme types – PTY

The PTY function can be used toselect different programme types,such as Pop music and Serious

classic. The PTY symbol indicatesthat the function is active. This function allowsprogramme types broadcast within a set sta-tion's RDS network to break through.

G021222

Activating/deactivating PTY

1. Select FM1 or FM2 with FM/AM.


3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Select PTY… and pressENTER.> A list of programme types appears:

Current affairs, Information etc. ThePTY function is activated by selectingprogramme types and deactivated byclearing all PTYs.

5. Select the desired programme types orClear all PTY…

Search PTY

This function searches the entire wavelengthfor the selected programme type.

1. Activate PTY.



4. Scroll to Search PTY and press ENTER.

If the radio finds any of the selected pro-gramme types, >| To seek appears on the dis-play. Press the navigation button to con-tinue searching for another broadcast of theselected programme types.

Display of programme type

The programme type of the current station canbe shown on the display.

NOTE

Not all radio stations support this function.

Activating/deactivating display



3. Scroll to Show PTY and press ENTER.

Radio text

Some RDS stations transmit information onprogramme content, artists, etc. This informa-tion can be shown on the display.

Activating/deactivating radio text


2. Scroll to Radio text and press ENTER.

Automatic frequency update – AF

The AF function selects one of the strongesttransmitters for a set station. The radio maysometimes need to search through the entireFM wavelength to find a strong transmitter. Ifthis occurs, the radio mutes and PI seekEXIT

to cancel appears in the display.

Activating/deactivating AF



3. Scroll to AF and press ENTER.

Regional radio programmes – REG

This function causes the radio to con-tinue with a regional transmitter evenif its signal strength is low.Regional indicates that the function

is active. The regional function is normallydeactivated.

G021223

Activating/deactivating REG



3. Scroll to Regional and press ENTER.


Radio functions

10

261

Enhanced Other Networks – EON

The EON function is especially useful in urbanareas with many regional radio stations. Itallows the distance between the car and theradio station transmitter to determine whenprogramme functions should interrupt the cur-rent audio source.

• Local – interrupts only if the radio stationtransmitter is close.

• Distant – interrupts if the station transmit-ter is far away, even if there is a lot of static.

• Off – no interruption for programmes fromother transmitters.

Activating/deactivating EON



3. Scroll to EON… and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Local, Distant or Off and pressENTER.

Resetting RDS functions

Resets all radio settings to the original factorysettings.



3. Scroll to Reset all… and press ENTER.

Volume control, programme types

The interrupting programme types are heard atthe volume selected for each programme type.If the volume level is adjusted during the pro-gramme interruption, the new level is saveduntil the next programme interruption.


CD functions

10


CD function controls

G019807

Navigation button – Fast forward/rewind,track selection and menus

CD changer position selection*

CD insertion/eject

CD insertion/eject slot

MODE - Selection of audio source (CD,AUX, USB*)

TUNING - Knob for track selection

Starting playback (CD player)

If a music CD is in the player when the audiosystem is in CD mode then playback is started

automatically. Otherwise, load a disc andchange to CD mode by pressing MODE.

Start playback (CD changer*)

If a CD position with a music CD is alreadyselected when the audio system is activatedthen playback starts automatically. Otherwisechange to CD changer mode using MODE andselect a disc with the number buttons 1–6 orUp/Down on the navigation button.

Insert a CD

1. Select an empty position with buttons 1–

6 or Up/Down on the navigation button.> An empty position is marked on the dis-

play. The text Insert disc shows that anew disc can be inserted. TheCD changer can hold up to 6 CD discs.

2. Inserting a CD in the CD changer.

CD eject

A CD will stay in the ejected position forapprox. 12 seconds. Following which it is re-inserted in the player and playback continues.

Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but-ton (3).

Eject all discs with a long press on the ejectbutton. The entire magazine is emptied disc bydisc. The message EJECT ALL is shown in thedisplay.

Pause

If the volume is turned down completely, theCD player is stopped. The player is restartedwhen volume is increased.

Audio files*

The CD player/CD changer* also supports MP3and WMA format audio files.

NOTE

Certain types of copy-protected audio filescannot be read by the player.

When a CD containing audio files is insertedinto the player the disc's folder structure is loa-ded in. It may take a while before playbackstarts due to the quality of the disc.

Navigation and playback

If a disc with audio files is inserted in theCD player then the disc's folder structure isshown by pressing ENTER. The folder struc-ture is navigated in the same way as the audiosystem's menu structure. Audio files have thesymbol and folders have the symbol .Start audio file playback with ENTER.

When the playback of a file is finished the play-back of the other files in the same folder con-tinues. Folder change takes place automati-


CD functions

10

263

cally when all files in the current folder havebeen played back.

Press left/right on the navigation button if thedisplay is not wide enough to show the wholeaudio file name.

Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio

files

Short presses right/left on the navigation but-ton are used to scroll betweenCD tracks/audio files. Long presses are usedto fast-wind CD tracks/audio files. TUNING (orthe steering wheel keypad) can also be usedfor this purpose.

Scan CD

This function plays the first 10 seconds of eachCD track/audio file. Press SCAN to activate.Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue play-back of the current CD track/audio file.

Random

This function plays the tracks in random order.The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrol-led through in the normal way.

NOTE

It is only possible to scroll between randomCD tracks 1 on the current disc.

Different messages appear on the displaydepending on which random function has beenselected:

• RANDOM means that the tracks from onlyone music CD are played

• RND ALL means that all tracks on allmusic CDs in the CD changer are played.

• RND FLD means that the audio files in afolder on the current CD are played.

Activating/deactivating, random (CD

player)

If a normal music CD is being played:


2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.

If a disc with audio files is being played:



3. Scroll to Folder or Disc and pressENTER.

Activating/deactivating, random (CD

changer)

If a normal music CD is being played:



3. Scroll to Single disc or All discs and pressENTER.

The option All discs only applies to the musicCDs in the changer.

If a CD with audio files is being played:



3. Scroll to Single disc or Folder and pressENTER.

The function is deactivated when another CDis selected.

Disc text

If title information is stored on a music CD thenit can be shown on the display2.

Activate/deactivate

1. Start CD playback.


3. Scroll to Disc text and press ENTER.

1 Applies to the CD changer.2 Applies to CD changer.


CD functions

10

264

CDs

Using low quality CD discs could result in pooror non-existent sound.

IMPORTANT

Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter).Do not use CD discs with adhesive disclabels. The heat in the CD player may causethe label to come off, damaging theCD player.


Menu structure – audio system

10


Overview

FM MENU1

1. News

2. TP

3. PTY…

4. Radio text

5. Advanced radio settings…

6.* Audio settings…

AM MENU


CD MENU

For CD player with CD disc.

1. Random

2. News

3. TP

4. Disc text


CD MENU

For CD player with MP3 disc.

1. Playlist

2. Random…

3. News

4. TP

5. Disc text


CD MENU

For CD changer* with CD discselected.

1. Random…

2. News

3. TP

4. Disc text


CD MENU

For CD changer* with MP3 discselected.

1. Playlist

2. Random…

3. News

4. TP

5. Disc text


AUX MENU

1. AUX input volume…

2. News

3. TP


USB MENU*

1. Playlist

2. Random…

3. News

4. TP

5. Track information

6. Audio settings…

1 The RDS functions available vary in the different markets.


Phone functions*

10


Phone system components.


Phone functions*

10


Phone system components

Antenna1

Steering wheel keypad. Most phone sys-tem functions can be accessed via the key-pad. see page 268.

Microphone. The microphone for hands-free is fitted in the roof by the sun visor.

Centre console control panel. All phonefunctions (except call volume) can be regu-lated via the control panel.

SIM card reader

General

• Always put traffic safety first.

• Switch off the phone system when refuel-ling the car.

• Switch off the system near blasting work.

• Volvo recommends that an authorisedVolvo workshop carries out phone systemservicing.

Emergency calls

Emergency calls to alarm centres can be madewithout a SIM card as long as there is coverageby a network operator.

Making an emergency call

1. Activate the phone.

2. Ring the emergency number that applies toyour region (within EU: 112).

3. Press ENTER.

IDIS

With the IDIS system (Intelligent DriverInformation System), incoming phone calls andSMS messages can be delayed so that con-centration can be focused on driving when IDISdetermines that the traffic situation requires ahigh level of attention.

Incoming calls and SMS messages can bedelayed 5 seconds before they are diverted. Ifthe current traffic situation still requires a highlevel of attention from the driver then theincoming call is diverted to the voice mail.Missed calls are shown in the display.

IDIS be disconnected using menu function 6.5,see page 273.

SIM card

G020244

The phone can only be used with a valid SIMcard Subscriber Identity Module. Cards areavailable from various network operators. Con-tact your network operator if you experiencedifficulties with the SIM card.

NOTE

The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIMcards (3G only). Combined 3G/GSM cardswork. Contact your network operator if areplacement SIM card is required.

1 Available only for built-in phone or RTI.


Phone functions*

10


Extra SIM card

Many network operators offer two SIM cardsfor the same phone number. The extra SIMcard can be used in the car.

Inserting the SIM card

1. Switch off the phone and open the glove-box.

2. Pull out the SIM card holder from the SIMcard reader, see illustration on page 267.

3. Position the SIM card in the holder with themetal surface visible. The bevelled edge ofthe SIM card should align with the bevel ofthe SIM card holder.

4. Carefully press in the SIM card holder.

Menus

Page 273 describes how to control phonefunctions with the menu system.

Traffic safety

For safety reasons, parts of the phone menusystem cannot be accessed at speeds inexcess of 8 km/h.

Phone controls

G019809

Centre console control panel.

VOLUME - Control the background vol-ume from the radio, for example, during acall

Number and letter buttons

MENU - Opens the main menu

EXIT - End/refuse calls, clear entered char-acters

Navigation button – Scroll in menus andcharacter rows

ENTER – Accept calls. A press of the but-ton reveals latest dialled numbers

PHONE - On/off and standby mode

Steering wheel keypad

G020243

When the phone is active, the steering wheelkeypad is locked to phone functions. To con-trol the audio system, the phone must be instandby mode (standby).

ENTER – Accept calls. A press of the but-ton reveals latest dialled numbers.

EXIT - End/refuse calls, clear entered char-acters. Changes between the audio menuand the phone menu.

Call volume – Increase/decrease

Navigation buttons – Scroll in menus


Phone functions*

10

��


On/Off

A handset appears in the display when thephone system is active or in standby mode(standby). If the remote control key is turned toposition 0 when the phone is in one of thesemodes, the phone automatically resumes thismode the next time the remote control key isturned to position I or II.

Activating the phone system

Phone system functions can only be usedwhen the phone is in active mode.

1. Press PHONE.

2. Enter the PIN code (if necessary) and pressENTER.

Deactivating the phone system

No calls can be received when the phone sys-tem is deactivated.

– Hold PHONE depressed until the phone isdeactivated.

Standby mode (standby)

In standby mode, the audio system can be inuse while calls are received. However, it is notpossible to make calls when in standby mode.

Putting the phone in standby mode

The phone must first be in active mode beforeit can be put in standby mode.

– Press PHONE.

Activating from standby mode

– Press PHONE.

Making and receiving calls

To call

1. Activate the phone system (if necessary).

2. Dial the number or use the phone book,see page 271.

3. Press ENTER.

Receiving a call

For Auto answer, see menu option 4.3, seepage 273.

– Press ENTER.

Ending a call

– Press EXIT.

Refusing a call

– Press EXIT.

Call waiting

A two-tone signal during a phone call indicatesthat there is another incoming call. Answer? isshown in the display. The call can be refusedor taken in the normal manner. If the incomingcall is taken, the previous call is put on hold.

Putting a call on hold/resuming a call

1. Press MENU or ENTER.

2. Scroll to Hold or Resume and pressENTER.

Dialling a third party

1. Put the call on hold.

2. Dial the number of the third party.

Switching between calls


2. Scroll to Swap and press ENTER.

Starting a conference call

A conference call consists of three parties thatcan talk to one another. Once a conference callhas been initiated, no more parties can be con-nected. All calls are ended when a conferencecall is ended.

1. Start two phone calls.


3. Scroll to Join and press ENTER.


Phone functions*

10


Volume

The phone uses the driver's door speaker.

Call volume

Call volume is regulated withthe steering wheel keypad.

Audio system volume

Audio system volume is temporarily loweredduring a phone call. Once the call is ended theprevious volume is resumed. If the volume isregulated during the call, the new level isretained once the call is ended. Sound can alsobe automatically muted during a phone call,see menu 6.4.3, on page 273. This functiononly applies to the Volvo integrated phone sys-tem.

Entering text

Text is entered using the phone keypad.

1. Press the key with the desired character -once for the first character on the button,twice for the second, etc. See table.

2. Press 1 for a space. If two characters in arow are to be entered using the same but-ton, press * or wait a few seconds.

A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-acter. A long press on EXIT will clear all enteredcharacters.

Key Function

space 1 - ? ! , . : " ' ( )

a b c 2 ä å à æ ç

d e f 3 è é

g h i 4 ì

j k l 5

m n o 6 ñ ö ò Ø

p q r s 7 ß

t u v 8 ü ù

w x y z 9

Pressed briefly if two char-acters shall be entered aftereach other with the samekey.

Key Function

+ 0 @ * # & $ £ / %

Switch between upper andlower case.

Handling numbers

Calling the last number dialled

The phone automatically stores the last phonenumbers dialled.

1. Press ENTER.

2. Scroll to a number and press ENTER.

Phonebook

If the phone book contains a live caller's con-tact information then this is shown in the dis-play. Contact information can be stored on theSIM card and in the phone.

Storing contacts in the phone book

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phone book… and pressENTER.

3. Scroll to New contact and press ENTER.

4. Enter a name and press ENTER.

5. Enter a number and press ENTER.


Phone functions*

10


6. Scroll to SIM card or Phone memory andpress ENTER.

Searching for contacts in the phone book

Use the down arrow of the navigation buttoninstead of MENU for direct access to theSearch menu.

1. Press MENU.


3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.

4. Enter the first few letters of the item andpress ENTER, or simply press ENTER.

5. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.

Copying entries between the SIM card

and Phone book

1. Press MENU.


3. Scroll to Copy all… and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to SIM to phone or Phone to SIM

and press ENTER.

Deleting contacts from the phone book

1. Press MENU.


3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.


5. Scroll to the item to be erased and pressENTER.

6. Scroll to Erase and press ENTER.

Erase all contacts

1. Press MENU.


3. Scroll to Erase SIM or Erase phone andpress ENTER.

If required, enter phone code. The factory-setdefault code is 1234.

Speed dial

A keypad button (1–9) can be used as a speeddial number for a contact in the phone book.

1. Press MENU.


3. Scroll to Speed dial… and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Select numbers and pressENTER.

5. Scroll to the digit of the keypad button forthe speed dial number and press ENTER.


7. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.

8. Hold EXIT depressed to leave the menusystem.

Calling using speed dial

– Briefly press the required keypad button,followed by ENTER.

NOTE

It takes a short time before speed diallingbecomes available after the phone has beenactivated.

To use the speed dial function Speed dial…

must be activated in the Phone book… menu,see page 275.

Calling from the phone book

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phone book… and pressENTER.> All contacts in the phone book memory

are displayed. The number of contactsdisplayed can be reduced by enteringpart of the contact's name.

3. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER.


Phone functions*

10


NOTE

Press ENTER to dial.

NOTE

Hold in the required letter/button in the key-pad for about 2 seconds to reach the cor-responding letter in the phone book.

Functions during a call

Several functions are available during a call.Some functions can only be used when a callis on hold.

Press MENU or ENTER during a call to accessthe In-call menu and scroll to one of the fol-lowing alternatives:

1. Mute microphone/Microphone on –Mute mode.

2. Hold/Resume - Put a call on hold orresume a call.

3. Phone book – Show phone book.

4. Join – Conference calling (available if morethan two parties are connected)

5. Swap – Switch between two calls (availa-ble if up to three parties are connected).

SMS - Short Message Service

Reading SMS

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Messages… and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Read and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to a message and press ENTER.> The message text is shown in the dis-

play. Additional selections can be madeby pressing ENTER. Hold EXIT

depressed to leave the menu system.

Writing and sending

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Messages… and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Write new and press ENTER.

4. Enter text and press ENTER.

5. Scroll to Send and press ENTER.

6. Enter a phone number and press ENTER.

IMEI number

To block the phone, you must provide yournetwork operator with the phone's IMEI num-ber. This is a 15 digit serial number that is pro-grammed into the phone. Dial *#06# to showthis number in the display. Write it down andkeep it in a safe place.

Specifications

Output 2 W

SIM card Small

Memory entries 250A

SMS (Short Message Serv-ice)

Yes

Data/Fax No

Dualband (900/1800 MHz) Yes

A In the phone, plus the number of memory spaces that areavailable on the SIM card.


Menu structure – phone*

10


Phone menu

1. Call register…

1.1. Last 10 missed calls

1.2. Last 10 received calls

1.3. Last 10 dialled calls

1.4. Erase list…

1.4.1. All calls

1.4.2. Missed calls

1.4.3. Received calls

1.4.4. Dialled numbers

1.5. Call duration…

1.5.1. Last call

1.5.2. Call count

1.5.3. Total time

1.5.4. Reset timers

2. Phone book…

2.1. Search

2.2. New contact

2.3. Copy all…

2.3.1. SIM to phone

2.3.2. Phone to SIM

2.4. Speed dial…

2.4.1. Active

2.4.2. Select numbers

2.5. Erase SIM

2.6. Erase phone

2.7. Memory status

3. Messages…

3.1. Read

3.2. Write new

3.3. Message settings…

3.3.1. SMSC number

3.3.2. Validity time…

3.3.3. Message type…

4 Call options…

4.1. Send my number

4.2. Call waiting

4.3. Automatic answer

4.4. Auto re-dial

4.5. Voice mail number

4.6. Diversions…

4.6.1. All calls

4.6.2. When busy

4.6.3. Not answered

4.6.4. Not reachable

4.6.5. Fax calls

4.6.6. Data calls

4.6.7. Cancel all

5. Change phone

5.1. Carphone

5.2. Add phone

5.3–7. Added phones1

NOTE

The menu above only applies to cars withBluetoothTM handsfree.

6. Phone settings…

6.1. Network selection…

6.1.1. Automatic

6.1.2. Manual select

6.2. SIM security…

6.2.1. On

6.2.2. Off

1 A maximum of 5 phones.



10


6.2.3. Automatic

6.3. Edit PIN code

6.4. Sounds and volume…

6.4.1. Ring volume

6.4.2. Ring signals…

6.4.3. Mute radio

6.4.4. Message beep

6.5. IDIS

6.6. Reset phone settings

Description of menu options

1. Call register

1.1. Last 10 missed

List of missed calls. You can choose to call,erase or store the number in the phone book.

1.2. Last 10 received

List of received calls. You can choose to call,erase or store the number in the phone book.

1.3. Last 10 dialled

List of dialled numbers. You can choose to call,erase or store the number in the phone book.

1.4. Erase list

Erase the lists found in the menus 1.1, 1.2 and1.3 as below.

1.4.1. All calls

1.4.2. Missed calls

1.4.3. Received calls

1.4.4. Dialled numbers

1.5. Call duration

Duration of all calls or of the most recent call.To reset the call timer, see menu 1.5.4.

1.5.1. Last call

1.5.2. Call count

1.5.3. Total time

1.5.4. Reset timers

2. Phone book

2.1. Search

Search for a name in the phone book.

2.2. New contact

Store names and phone numbers in the phonebook, see page 270.

2.3. Copy all

Copy phone numbers and names from the SIMcard to the phone memory.

2.3.1. SIM to phone

2.3.2. Phone to SIM

2.4. Speed dial

A number stored in the phone book can bestored as a speed dial number.

2.4.1 Active

2.4.2 Select numbers

2.5. Erase SIM

Erase the entire SIM card memory.

2.6. Erase phone

Erase the entire phone memory.

2.7. Memory status

Shows how many positions are occupied in theSIM card and phone memory. The table showshow many of the total number of positions areoccupied, e.g. 100 (250).

3. Messages

3.1. Read

Received text messages. Select whether toerase, forward, change or save the entire mes-sage or parts of it.

3.2. Write new

Write a message using the keypad. Choosewhether to save or send it.

3.3. Message settings

Enter the number (SMSC number) of the mes-sage centre to which messages are to be trans-ferred as well as how long they are to be savedat the message centre. Contact your network



10


operator for information on message settings.Normally, these settings should not be altered.

3.3.1. SMSC number

3.3.2. Validity time…

3.3.3. Message type…

4. Call settings

4.1. Send my number

Displays or hides your phone number to/fromthe person you call. Contact your networkoperator regarding ex-directory numbers.

4.2. Call waiting

Be alerted during a phone call that there isanother incoming call.

4.3. Auto answer

Automatically answers incoming calls.

4.4. Auto redial

Automatically calls a previously engaged num-ber.


Stores voice mail number.

4.6. Call divert

Choose when and what type of calls are to bediverted to a specified phone number.

4.6.1. All calls

This setting only applies during the call in pro-gress.

4.6.2 When busy

4.6.3. Not answered

4.6.4. Not reachable

4.6.5. Fax calls

4.6.6. Data calls

4.6.7. Cancel all

5. Change phone

5.1. Car phone

Select the built-in phone.

5.2. Add phone

Add mobile phones to the list Added phones.

5.3-7. Added phones

Select to connect to one of the added phones(up to 5 phones).

NOTE

The menu above only applies to cars withBluetoothTM handsfree.

6. Phone settings

6.1. Selecting network

Choose a network automatically or manually.The selected network is shown in the display inthe phone's basic mode.

6.1.1. Automatic

6.1.2. Manual select

6.2. SIM security

Select if the PIN code should be on, off or if thephone should automatically give the PIN code.

6.2.1. On

6.2.2. Off

6.2.3. Automatic

6.3. Edit PIN code

Change PIN code. Write down and save thecode in a safe place.

6.4. Sounds and volume

6.4.1. Ring volume

Adjust the ring tone volume.


There are seven different ring tones.

6.4.3. Mute radio

The radio can be switched off/on.

6.4.4. Message beep

6.5. IDIS

If the IDIS function is deactivated, incomingcalls are not delayed, regardless of the drivingsituation.

6.6. Reset phone settings

Reset the system's factory settings.


Bluetooth handsfree*

10


General

System overview.

Mobile phone

Microphone

Centre console

BluetoothTM

A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothTM

can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys-tem. The audio system then works handsfree,with the option to control a range of the mobilephone's functions remotely. The microphone isfitted in the roof console (2). The mobile phonecan always be operated by its own keys irre-spective of whether or not it is connected.

NOTE

Only a selection of mobile phones are fullycompatible with the handsfree function.Volvo recommends that you seek assis-tance from an authorised Volvo dealer orvisit www.volvocars.com for information oncompatible phones.

Menus and controls

The menus are navigated using the controlpanel in the centre console (3), see page 268.

Remember

The menus are controlled from the centre con-sole and the steering wheel keypad. For gen-eral information on menus, see page 273.

NOTE

If the car is equipped with bothBluetoothTM handsfree and built-in phonethen there is an additional menu in thephone menu, see page 273.

Activate/deactivate

A short press on PHONE activates the hands-free function. The text PHONE at the top of thedisplay shows that it is in phone mode. Thesymbol shows that the handsfree func-tion is active.

One long press on PHONE deactivates thehandsfree function and disconnects a con-nected phone.

Connect mobile phone

A mobile phone is connected in different waysdepending on whether or not it has been con-nected previously. To connect a mobile phonefor the first time, follow the instructions below:

Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system

1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visiblevia BluetoothTM, see the mobile phone'smanual or www.volvocars.com.

2. Activate the handsfree function withPHONE.> Menu option Add phone appears on

the display. If one or more mobilephones have already been registeredthen these are also shown.

3. Select Add phone.> The audio system searches for mobile

phones in the vicinity. The search takesapproximately 30 seconds. The mobilephones detected are specified with theirrespective BluetoothTM name in the dis-play. The handsfree function'sBluetoothTM name is shown in themobile phone as My Volvo Car.



10


4. Choose one of the mobile phones in theaudio system display.

5. Enter the number series shown in the audiosystem display via the mobile phone key-pad.

Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system

1. Activate the handsfree function withPHONE. If there is a phone connected,disconnect the connected phone.

2. Search with the phone's BluetoothTM, seethe mobile phone's manual.

3. Select My Volvo Car in the list of unitsdetected in your mobile phone.

4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobilephone when prompted for the PIN code.

5. Select to connect to My Volvo Car fromthe mobile phone.

The mobile phone is registered and connectedautomatically to the audio system while the textSynchronising is shown in the display. Formore information on how mobile phones areregistered, see page 278.

When the connection is established the symbol is shown and the mobile phone's

BluetoothTM name is shown in the display. Now

the mobile phone can be controlled from theaudio system.

To call

1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shownat the top of the display and that the symbol is visible.

2. Dial the number or use the phone book,see page 279.

3. Press ENTER.

The call is interrupted with EXIT.

Disconnecting the mobile phone

Automatic disconnection takes place if themobile phone moves out of the audio system'srange. For more information on connection,see page 278.

Manual disconnection takes place by deacti-vating the handsfree function with one longpress on PHONE. The handsfree function isalso deactivated when the engine is switchedoff or when a door is opened1.

When the mobile phone has been discon-nected an ongoing call can be continued withthe mobile phone's built-in microphone andspeaker.

NOTE

Some mobile phones require that thechangeover from handsfree is confirmedfrom the phone's keypad.

Making and receiving calls

Incoming call

Calls are accepted with ENTER even if theaudio system is in CD or FM mode for example.Refuse or end with EXIT.

Auto answer

The automatic answer function means thatcalls are accepted automatically. Activate/deactivate under Phone Menu… Call

options… Automatic answer.

In-call menu

Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing callto access the following functions:

• Mute microphone - audio system micro-phone is muted.

• Transfer call to mobile - the call is trans-ferred to the mobile phone.

1 Applies to Keyless Drive.



10


NOTE

With certain mobile phones the connectionis terminated when the privacy function isused. This is normal. The handsfree functionasks if you want to reconnect.

• Phone book – searching in the phonebook.

NOTE

A new call cannot be started during anongoing call.

Audio settings

Call volume

Call volume can be adjusted during calls. Usethe steering wheel keypad.

Audio system volume

In phone mode (PHONE) the audio system vol-ume can be adjusted as usual with VOLUME.

The audio source can be automatically mutedfor incoming calls under Phone Menu…

Phone settings… Sounds and volume…

Mute radio.

Ring volume

Go to Phone Menu… Phone settings…

Sounds and volume… Ring volume

and adjust with / on the navigation but-ton.

Ring signals

The handsfree function has integrated ring sig-nals that can be selected under Phone

Menu… Phone settings… Sounds and

volume… Ring signals… Ring signal 1

etc.

NOTE

The connected mobile phone's ring signal isnot deactivated when one of the handsfreesystem's integrated signals is used.

In order to select the connected phone's ringsignal2, go to Phone Menu… Phone

settings… Sounds and volume… Ring

signals… Use mobile phone signal.

More on registering and connecting

A maximum of three mobile phones can beregistered. Registration is performed once perphone. After registration the mobile phone is inthe list of added phones. Not more than onemobile phone can be connected at a time.Phones can be deregistered under Phone

Menu… Bluetooth… Remove phone.

Automatic connection

When the handsfree function is active and thelast mobile phone connected is in range it isconnected automatically. When the audio sys-tem searches for the last phone connected itsname is shown in the display. To change overto manual connection of another phone, pressEXIT.

Manual connection

If you want to connect a mobile phone otherthan the last connected or change the con-nected mobile phone, proceed as follows:

Set the audio system in phone mode(PHONE) and follow the instructions on thedisplay or change the connected mobile phoneby using the menu system as described below.

The menu structure is available in two variantsdepending on whether the car only has

2 Not supported by all mobile phones.



10


BluetoothTM or if the car also has a built-inphone.

• For cars with only BluetoothTM the connec-tion is made under Phone Menu…

Bluetooth… Change phone Add

phone or select one of the previously con-nected phones.

• For cars with built-in phone andBluetoothTM the connection is made underPhone Menu… Change phone Add

phone or select one of the previously con-nected phones.

Phonebook

All use of the phone book presupposes that thetext PHONE is shown at the top of the displayand that the symbol is visible.

The audio system stores a copy of the phonebook from each registered mobile phone. Thephone book is copied automatically to theaudio system during each connection. Deacti-vate the function under Phone settings…

Synchronise phone book. Searching for con-tacts is only performed in the connectedmobile phone's phone book.

NOTE

If the mobile phone does not support copy-ing of the phone book then List is empty isshown when copying is finished.

If the phone book contains a ringing caller'scontact information then this is shown in thedisplay.

Searching for contacts

The easiest way to search in the phone book iswith long presses on the keys 2–9. This startsa search in the phone book based on the key'sfirst letter.

The phone book can also be reached with / on the navigation button or with / on

the steering wheel keypad. The search can alsobe performed from the phone book's Searchmenu under Phone book… Search:

1. Enter the first few letters of the contact andpress ENTER. Or simply press ENTER.

2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER tocall.

Voice recognition

The mobile phone's voice recognition functionfor dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.

NOTE

Only a selection of mobile phones are fullycompatible with the voice recognition func-tion. Volvo recommends that you contact anauthorised Volvo dealer or visitwww.volvocars.com for information oncompatible phones.

Voice mail number

The number to the voice mail is changed underCall options… Voice mail number. If nonumber is stored then this menu is reachedwith one long press on 1. Press 1 for a long timeto use the stored number.

Call lists

The call lists are copied to the handsfree func-tion at each new connection and are thenupdated during the connection. Press ENTER

to show the last dialled. Other call lists areavailable under Call register….

NOTE

Certain mobile phones show a list of the lastdialled numbers in reverse order.

Inputting text

Input text using the keypad in the centre con-sole. Press once for the key's first character,



10


twice for the second etc. Continue pressing formore characters, see the table on page 270.

A short press on EXIT deletes an input char-acter. One long press on EXIT clears all inputcharacters. / on the navigation buttonscrolls between the characters.

Menu structure - BluetoothTM

handsfree

NOTE

The menu for BluetoothTM handsfree isavailable in two variants. For cars with onlyBluetoothTM handsfree and for cars withbuilt-in phone and BluetoothTM handsfree.

1. Call register…




2. Phone book…

2.1. Search

2.2. Copy fr. mobile phone

3. Bluetooth…

3.1. Change phone

3.1.1. Add phone

3.1.2–6.Added phones3

3.2. Remove phone

3.3. Connect fr. mobile phone

3.4. Car Bluetooth info

4. Call options…





5.1.1. Ring volume


5.1.3. Mute radio

5.2. Synchronise phone book

Menu structure - BluetoothTM

handsfree with built-in phone

1. Call register…




2. Phone book…

2.1. Search

2.2. Copy fr. mobile phone

3. Bluetooth…

3.1. Remove phone

3.2. Connect fr. mobile phone

3.3. Car Bluetooth info

4. Call options…



5. Change phone

5.1. Carphone

5.2. Add phone

5.3–7. Added phones3

3 A maximum of 5 phones.



10




6.1.1. Ring volume


6.1.3. Mute radio

6.2. Synchronise phone book

282

Type designation................................................................................... 284Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 286Engine specifications............................................................................ 289Engine oil............................................................................................... 290Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 292Fuel....................................................................................................... 295Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ......................................... 298Electrical system................................................................................... 300Type approval....................................................................................... 302Symbols in the display.......................................................................... 303

SPECIF ICATIONS

11 Specifications

Type designation

11

284

11 Specifications

Type designation

11

285

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicleidentification and engine numbers can facili-tate all contact with a Volvo dealer regardingthe car and when ordering spare parts andaccessories.

Type designation, vehicle identificationnumber, maximum permissible weights,codes for colour and upholstery and typeapproval number.S40 and V50: The label is visible when theright rear door is opened. C30 and C70:The label is visible when the right door isopened.

Label for parking heater.

Engine code, component and serial num-bers.

Label for engine oil.

Gearbox type designation and serial num-ber:

manual gearbox

, automatic gearbox

The car's identification number (VIN –Vehicle Identification Number).

Further information on the car is presented inthe registration document.

NOTE

The labels shown in the owner's manual arenot provided as exact reproductions ofthose in the car. The purpose is to showtheir approximate appearance and locationin the car. The information that applies toyour car in particular is available on the labelin question in your car.

11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

11

286

Dimensions

Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2640

B Length 4266

C Load length, floor,folded seat

1486

D Load length, floor 663

E Load height 642

F Height 1447

Dimensions mm

G Front track 1548A

1535B

H Rear track 1544A

1531B

I Load width, floor 713

J Width 1782 (1797C)

Dimensions mm

K Width including doormirrors

2039

L Width including folded-in door mirrors

1871

A with 15" wheelB with 16" and 17" wheelsC with Keyless drive*

11 Specifications


11

287

Weights

Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank90% full and all fluids.

The weight of passengers and accessories,and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, seetable) influences the payload and is notincluded in the kerb weight.

Permitted maximum load = Gross vehicleweight - Kerb weight.

NOTE

The documented kerb weight applies tocars in the standard version - i.e. a car with-out extra equipment or accessories. Thismeans that for every accessory added theloading capacity of the car is reduced cor-respondingly by the weight of the acces-sory.

Examples of accessories that reduce load-ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/Summum equipment levels, as well as otheraccessories such as Towbar, Load carriers,Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps,GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Car-pets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc.

Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer-taining the kerb weight of your own partic-ular car.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics changedepending on how heavily it is loaded andhow the load is distributed.

For decal location, see page 284.

Max. total weight

Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Max. front axle load

Max. rear axle load

Equipment level

Max. load: See registration document.

Max. roof load: 75 kg.

11 Specifications


11

288

Towing capacity and towball load

Engine Maximum weight, braked trailer (kg) Maximum towball load (kg)

1.6 1200 50

DRIVe 1300 75

D2 1300 75

2.0F 1350 75

2.0 1350 75

others 1500 75

Engine Maximum weight, unbraked trailer (kg) Maximum towball load (kg)

1.6 600 50

2.0, D2 and DRIVe 650 50

others 700 50

11 Specifications

Engine specifications

11

289

Overview

NOTE

Not all engines are available in all markets.

Engine Engine

codeA

Output(kW/rpm)

Output(hp/rpm)

Torque (Nm/rpm)

No. ofcylinders

Bore(mm)

Stroke(mm)

Sweptvolume(litres)

Com-pression

ratio

1.6 B4164S3 74/6000 100/6000 150/4000 4 79 81.4 1.596 11.0:1

2.0F B4204S4 107/6000 145/6000 185/4500 4 87.5 83.1 1.999 10.8:1

2.0 B4204S3 107/6000 145/6000 185/4500 4 87.5 83.1 1.999 10.8:1

T5 B5254T7 169/5000 230/5000 320/1500 – 5000 5 83 93.2 2.521 9.0:1

DRIVe D4162T 84/3600 115/3600 270/1750-2500 4 75 88.3 1.560 16.0:1

D2 D4162T 84/3600 115/3600 270/1750-2500 4 75 88.3 1.560 16.0:1

D3 D5204T5 110/3500 150/3500 350/1500-2750 5 81 77 1.984 16.5:1

D4 D5204T 130/3500 177/3500 400/1750-2750 5 81 77 1.984 16.5:1

A Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 284.

11 Specifications

Engine oil

11

290

Adverse driving conditions

Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.Below are some examples of adverse drivingconditions.

Check the oil level more frequently for longjourneys:

• towing a caravan or trailer

• in mountainous regions

• at high speeds

• in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hot-ter than +40 °C

The above also apply to shorter driving dis-tances at low temperatures.

Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adversedriving conditions. It provides extra protectionfor the engine.

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for theengine's service intervals all engines arefilled with a specially adapted syntheticengine oil at the factory. The choice of oilhas been made very carefully with regard toservice life, starting characteristics, fuelconsumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used inorder that the recommended service inter-vals can be applied. Only use a prescribedgrade of oil for both filling and oil change,otherwise you will risk affecting service life,starting characteristics, fuel consumptionand environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war-ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribedgrade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.

11 Specifications

Engine oil

11

291

Engine oil grade

Engine Engine code Recommended oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres)

1.6 B4164S3 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 5W–30

approx. 4.0

2.0F B4204S4 approx. 4.3

2.0 B4204S3 approx. 4.3

DRIVe D4162T approx. 3.8

D2 D4162T approx. 3.8

D4 D5204T Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 0W–30

approx. 5.9

D3 D5204T5 approx. 5.9

T5 B5254T7 approx. 5.8

For filling engine oil, see page 222.

11 Specifications

Fluids and lubricants

11

292

Overview

IMPORTANT

The recommended transmission fluid mustbe used to prevent damage to the gearbox.Do not mix with any other transmission fluid.If the transmission is topped up with a dif-ferent fluid, contact a workshop nearby forservicing. Volvo recommends that you con-tact an authorised Volvo workshop.

Gearbox oil

Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

IB5 2.1 BOT 130 M

B6 1.6

BOT 350M3MTX75 1.8

M66 1.9

Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

MPS6 7.3 BOT 341

AW55-51 7.7 JWS 3309

TF-80SC 7.0 AW1

11 Specifications


11

��

293

Fluids

Fluid System Volume(litres)

Recommended oil grade

Coolant 1.6 5.8 Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% waterA, see the packaging. The thermostatstarts opening at:

petrol engine (1.6) 82 °C

petrol engines 90 °C

diesel engines 82 °C

diesel engine (D2) 83 °C

2.0 and 2.0F 6.5

T5, manual gear-box

7.0

T5, automaticgearbox

7.5

D2 and DRIVe 6.2

D3 and D4 8.5

Refrigerant Air conditioning B R134a (HFC134a)

Oil: PAG

Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+

Powersteeringfluid

Power steering 0.8 – 0.9 WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product with same specifications.

Washer fluid 4-cyl. Petrol/Die-sel

4.0 Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during cold weather and belowfreezing point.

5-cyl. Petrol/Die-sel

6.5

11 Specifications


11

294

Fluid System Volume(litres)

Recommended oil grade

Fuel Petrol: 1.6, 2.0,2.0F

approx. 55 Petrol: see page 145

Petrol: T5 approx. 62

Diesel: D2 andDRIVe

approx. 52 Diesel: see page 146

Diesel: D3 andD4

approx. 60

A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.B Refrigerant quantity varies depending on engine variant. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the correct information.

11 Specifications

Fuel

11

��

295

CO2 emissions and fuel consumption

A B C

2.0F 254 (242A) 10.9 (14.8A) 137 (135A) 5.9 (8.2A) 180 (174A) 7.7 (10.6A)

2.0 252 10.8 134 5.8 177 7.6

T5 294 12.6 150 6.4 203 8.7

T5 315 13.5 151 6.5 211 9.0

DRIVe 112 4.3 92 3.5 99 3.8

D2 137 5.2 101 3.8 114 4.3

D3 183 7.0 106 4.0 134 5.1

D3 210 7.9 122 4.6 154 5.8

11 Specifications

Fuel

11

296

A B C

D4 183 7.0 106 4.0 134 5.1

D4 210 7.9 122 4.6 154 5.8

A E85

: gram/km

: litre/100 km

A = urban driving

B = extra-urban driving

C = combined driving

Fuel consumption and emissions of

carbon dioxide

Fuel consumption and emission values in thetable above are based on specific EU cycles1,that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basicversion and without extra equipment. The car'sweight may increase depending on equipment.

This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded,increases fuel consumption and carbon diox-ide emissions.

There are several reasons for increased fuelconsumption compared with the table's val-ues. Examples of this are:

• The driver's driving style.

• If the customer has specified wheels largerthan those fitted as standard on the mod-el's basic version, then resistance increa-ses.

• High speed results in increased wind resis-tance.

• Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,weather and the condition of the car.

Even a combination of the above-mentionedexamples can result in significantly improvedconsumption. For further information, pleaserefer to the regulations referred to.

Large deviations in fuel consumption may arisein a comparison with the EU driving cycleswhich are used in the certification of the carand on which the consumption figures in thetable are based.

To bear in mind

Tips that the driver can use in order to reduceconsumption:

1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulationno 692/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold startingthe engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. - A car with a D2 engine and 6-speed manualtransmission with Start/Stop is started in 2nd gear. - The value for combined driving, which is given in the table, according to legislation, is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving.CO2 emission - to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions from the two driving cycles, the exhaust gases are collected. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.

11 Specifications

Fuel

11

297

• Drive gently and avoid unnecessary accel-eration as well as braking too hard.

• Drive with the correct air pressure in thetyres and check this regularly - select ECOtyre pressure for best results, see the tyrepressure table on page 298.

• Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump-tion - seek advice on suitable tyres from adealer.

See further information and more advice onpages 13 and 142.

See page 144 for general information on fuel.

11 Specifications

Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure

11

298

Approved tyre pressures

Engine Tyre size Speed (km/h) Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load

Front (kPa)A Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa) ECO pressureB

D2

DRIVe

195/65 R150–160 230 210 270 270 270

160+ 250 210 280 260 -

205/55 R160–160 230 210 250 250 250

160+ 250 210 280 260 -

205/50 R170–160 240 220 250 250 250

160+ 260 220 280 260 -

1.6

2.0

2.0F

195/65 R15

205/55 R16

0–160 230 210 250 250 250

160+ 250 210 280 260 -

205/50 R17

215/45 R18C

0–160 240 220 250 250 250

160+ 260 220 280 260 -

11 Specifications

Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure

11

299

Engine Tyre size Speed (km/h) Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load

Front (kPa)A Rear (kPa) Front (kPa) Rear (kPa) ECO pressureB

T5

D3

D4

205/55 R160–160 230 210 250 250 250

160+ 260 210 280 260 -

205/50 R17

215/45 R18

0–160 240 220 250 250 250

160+ 270 220 290 270 -

Temporary Spare Tyre 0–80 420 420 420 420 -

A In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.B Economical driving, see page 198C The 1.6 cannot be specified with this tyre.

NOTE

All engines, tyres or combinations of theseare not always available in all markets.

11 Specifications

Electrical system

11

300

General

The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.The electrical system is single-pole and usesthe chassis and engine casing as a conductor.

The battery capacity is dependent upon theequipment level in the vehicle. If the starterbattery is replaced, therefore, you must ensurethat you switch to a battery with the same

capacity as the original battery (see the labelon the battery).

Battery

Voltage (V) Cold start capacity,

CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)

Reserve capacity

(minutes)

Capacity (Ah)

12590 100 60

760 A 120 70

12 700 B 135 80

A Cars equipped with High Performance audio system.B Cars equipped with diesel, keyless drive, Premium Sound audio system, fuel-driven heater or RTI.

Bulbs

Lighting Output (W) Type

Dipped beam, halogen 55 H7 LL

Main beam, halogen 65 H9

Extra main beam, ABL 55 H7 LL

Front direction indicators 24 PY24W SV

Position/parking lamps, front 5 W5W LL BV

11 Specifications

Electrical system

11


Lighting Output (W) Type

Side marker lamps, front 5 WY5W LL

Fog lamps 35 H8

Side direction indicators, door mirrors 5 WY5W LL

Front courtesy lighting 3 T10 Socket W2.1x9.5d

Glovebox lighting 3 T10 Socket W2.1x9.5d

Vanity mirror lighting* 1.2 Socket SV5.5 Length 35 mm

Cargo area lighting 5 Socket SV8.5 Length 38 mm

Number plate lighting 5 C5W LL

Rear direction indicators 21 PY21W LL

Position lamps, rear 4 P21/4W LL

Brake light 21 P21W LL

Reversing lamp 21 P21W LL

Rear fog lamp 21 P21/4W LL

11 Specifications

Type approval

11

302

Remote control key system

Country andregion

A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK,E, EST, F, FIN, GB,GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT,LV, M, NL, P, PL, S,SK, SLO

Delphi herebycertifies that thisremote control keysystem conforms tothe essential char-acteristic require-ments and other rel-evant regulations ofdirective 1999/5/EC.

IS, LI, N, CH

HR

ROK Delphi 2003-07-15,Germany R-LPD1-03-0151

BR

TW

ETC093LPD0155

Certification of the Keyless Drivesystem

Siemens VDO Automotive A.G. hereby certifiesthat this equipment type 5WK4 8952,5WK48956, 5WK48812 conforms to theessential characteristic requirements and otherrelevant regulations of Directive 1999/5/EC.

11 Specifications

Symbols in the display

11

��


General

There are a variety of different symbols in thedisplay in the car. The symbols are divided intowarning, indicator and information symbols.Shown below are the most common symbolswith their meanings and a reference to wherein the manual further information can be found.For more information on symbols and textmessages, see pages 50 and 54.

- Red warning symbol, illuminates whena fault has been indicated which could affectthe safety and/or driveability of the car. Anexplanatory text is shown on the informationdisplay at the same time.

- Yellow information symbol, illuminatesin combination with text in the information dis-play, when a deviation in any of the car's sys-tems has occurred. The yellow symbol infor-mation can also illuminate in combination withother symbols.


Indicator and warning symbols in the

combined instrument panel

Symbol Meaning Page

Warning 19, 30, 50, 53,161

Information 50, 53, 161,170, 172

Emissionssystem

50, 51

Fault in theABS system

51, 52

Rear fog lamp 51

Symbol Meaning Page

Stability sys-tem, DSTC*

51, 169, 170

Engine pre-heater (diesel)

51

Low level infuel tank

51

Indicatorsymbol fortrailer

52

Parking brakeapplied

52

Airbags - SRS 19, 52

11 Specifications


11


Symbol Meaning Page

Low oil pres-sure

50, 52

Seatbeltreminder

16, 52

Alternator notcharging

52

Fault in brakesystem

52, 167

Main beamindicator

49

Symbol Meaning Page

Left directionindicators

49

Right direc-tion indicators

49

Other information symbols in the

combined instrument panel

Symbol Meaning Page

Rain sensor* 66

Cruise control* 68

Gear shift indicator* 157

Information symbols in the centre

console display

Symbol Meaning Page

G021216

Surround sound (onlyPremium Sound)

255

G021221

News 259

G021222

Programme types 259

G021223

Regional radio pro-grammes

260

Audio files 262

Directory in CD disc 262

G021220

Traffic information 259

Phone* 276

BluetoothTM hands-free*

276

11 Specifications


11

305

Information symbols in the roof console

display

Symbol Meaning Page

Seatbelt reminder 17

Airbag, passengerseat, activated

22, 23

Airbag, passengerseat, deactivated

23


12

306

A

A/Celectronic climate control..................... 97manual climate control................... 92, 93

ABS fault............................................ 51, 167

Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 59

Active headlamps...................................... 59

Adaptation............................................... 155

Additional heater (Diesel)......................... 102

Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 190halogen headlamp.............................. 190

AF – automatic frequency update........... 260

Airbag........................................................ 20activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 22driver's and front passenger side......... 21key switch off........................................ 22

AIRBAG ..................................................... 20

Airbag system............................................ 20

Air conditioning.......................................... 92ECC...................................................... 95general.................................................. 90

Air distribution............................................ 98ECC...................................................... 96

Air distribution, A/C................................... 93

Air quality system, ECC............................. 96

Air vents..................................................... 91

Alarm........................................................ 137alarm indicator.................................... 137alarm signals....................................... 138arming................................................. 137automatic alarm activation................. 138deactivating a triggered alarm............ 138disarming............................................ 137RDS traffic warning............................. 259reduced alarm level............................ 138testing the alarm system.................... 138

Alcolock................................................... 148

Antenna location, Keyless drive............... 132

Approach light, duration.................... 77, 126setting................................................... 82

Armrest in the rear seat .......................... 119

Audio, see also Sound............................. 252

Audio volumephone.......................................... 270, 278phone/media player............................ 278programme types............................... 261ring signal, phone............................... 278

Autoclimate control settings........................ 95

AUTOstoring stations................................... 257

Auto climate............................................... 95

Automatic car washes............................. 210

Automatic gearboxmanual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 158towing and recovery........................... 176trailer........................................... 181, 182

Automatic locking.................................... 135

Automatic relocking................................. 134

Autostart.................................................. 152

Auto volume control................................ 255

Auxiliary heater........................................ 102

Average fuel consumption......................... 63

B

Backrest rear seat, lowering.................... 118

Bass speaker........................................... 254

Battery............................................. 230, 300changing the battery in the remote con-trol key................................................ 133maintenance............................... 219, 230overload.............................................. 143


12

307

specifications...................................... 300start assistance................................... 180symbols on the battery....................... 230warning symbols................................. 230

Bioethanol E85........................................ 145

Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 173

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS 78, 173

Bluetoothhandsfree............................................ 276mute microphone............................... 277transfer call to mobile......................... 277

Bluetoothmedia.................................................. 254streaming audio.................................. 254

Boardingrear seat.............................................. 107

Bonnet, opening...................................... 220

Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 226

Brake light.................................................. 61

Brakesanti-lock braking system, ABS........... 167brake light............................................. 61Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 168emergency brake lights...................... 168handbrake............................................. 72

Brake system........................................... 167

Bulb holderremoval............................................... 237

Bulbschanging............................................. 234

Bulbs, see Lighting.......................... 234, 300

C

Callsfunctions during a call................ 269, 272incoming............................................. 277operation..................................... 269, 277volume in phone................................. 270

Car care................................................... 210

Car care, leather upholstery.................... 212

Cargo area............................................... 120cargo cover......................................... 120lighting................................................ 111loading................................................ 189safety net............................................ 122

Cargo cover............................................. 120

Car settings............................................... 82

Car upholstery......................................... 211

Car wash.................................................. 210

Catalytic converter................................... 145recovery.............................................. 176

CD discsstorage compartment......................... 116

CD functions............................................ 262

Checking and topping up the coolant..... 225

Checking the engine oil level................... 222

Checksfluids and oils...................................... 222

Children..................................................... 31child seats and side airbags................. 24location in the car................................. 31location in the car, table....................... 32safety.................................................... 31

Child seat................................................... 31

Child seats................................................. 31ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 37size classes for child seats with the ISO-FIX fixture system................................. 37upper mounting points for child seats.. 40

Cigarette lighter socketfront seat............................................... 56

Cleaningautomatic car washes......................... 210car wash............................................. 210rims..................................................... 210


12

308

seatbelts............................................. 213upholstery........................................... 211

Climate controlgeneral.................................................. 90personal preferences............................ 81

Climate control settingsauto....................................................... 95

Clock, adjustment...................................... 81

Clutch fluid, checking & topping up........ 226

Coat hanger............................................. 115

Cold start................................................. 160automatic gearbox.............................. 160

Collisioncrash mode........................................... 30inflatable curtain, IC.............................. 26

Colour code, paint................................... 214

Combined instrument panel...................... 49

Compass................................................... 75calibration............................................. 75setting the zone.................................... 75

Condensation in headlamps.................... 210

Coolant.................................................... 225

Cooling system........................................ 142

Crash, see Collision................................... 30

Cruise control............................................ 68

D

Deadlockdeactivation........................................ 135temporary deactivation....................... 135

Deadlocks................................................ 135

Defroster.................................................... 93

Diesel....................................................... 146

Diesel: engine preheater............................ 51

Diesel particle filter.................................. 146

Dipstick, electronic.................................. 224

Direction indicators.................................... 62

Disc text................................................... 263

Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 160

Display, messages..................................... 54

Display lighting.......................................... 59

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II............ 251, 255

Door mirrors............................................... 77

Driver's door control panel.................. 48, 73

Drivingcooling system.................................... 142economical......................................... 142in water............................................... 142slippery driving conditions.................. 143with trailer........................................... 181

Driving in water........................................ 142

Driving with a trailertowball load........................................ 287towing capacity.................................. 287

DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 169

DSTC, see also Stability systemsymbol.................................................. 51

During a call, functions............................ 272

E

ECC, electronic climate control................. 91

Economical driving.................................. 142

ECO pressure.......................................... 198table............................................ 198, 298

Eco Start/Stop DRIVe.............................. 163

Electrical socketcentre console...................................... 56rear seat................................................ 56


12

309

Electrical system...................................... 300

Emergency calls...................................... 267

Emergency equipmentwarning triangle.................................. 199

Emergency puncture repair..................... 203

Emission controlfault indicator........................................ 51

Engine block heater................................. 154fuel-driven............................................. 99

Engine compartment............................... 220coolant................................................ 225oil........................................................ 222power steering fluid............................ 227

Engine oil......................................... 222, 290adverse driving conditions.................. 290capacities........................................... 290filter..................................................... 222oil grade.............................................. 290oil pressure........................................... 52

Engine specifications............................... 289

Entry, keyless............................................. 82

Environmental labelling, FSC, owner'smanual....................................................... 13

EON - Enhanced Other Networks............ 261

Equalizer.................................................. 255

Error messages in BLIS........................... 174

Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 17

External dimensions................................ 286

Extra mats................................................ 110

F

FanA/C........................................................ 92ECC...................................................... 95

Fast-wind................................................. 263

First aid equipment.................................. 200

Flexifuel.................................................... 154adaptation........................................... 155

Floor hatch............................................... 121

Floor mats................................................ 110

Fluids, capacities..................................... 292

Fluids and oils.................................. 222, 292

Fluids and oils, checks, engine compart-ment......................................................... 222

Fluids and oils general............................. 222

Fog lampsrear........................................................ 59

Fog lamps, on/off...................................... 59

Fold down the rear seat backrest ........... 118

Frequency update, automatic.................. 260

Front seats, heated.................................... 93

FSC, environmental labelling..................... 13

FuelCO2 emissions.................................... 295consumption....................................... 295fuel consumption, display..................... 63fuel economy...................................... 198fuel filter.............................................. 146level indicator........................................ 51parking heater....................................... 99refuelling............................................. 144

Fuses....................................................... 240box in the engine compartment.......... 241changing............................................. 240general................................................ 240relay/fuse box in the passenger com-partment............................................. 245

G

Gearboxmanual................................................ 157

Gear selector inhibitor............................. 159


12

310

Geartronic................................................ 158

General information on fuel..................... 144

Glovebox................................................. 115locking................................................ 128

Gross vehicle weight............................... 287

GSI - Gear selector assistance........ 157, 164

H

Handbrake................................................. 72

Hazard warning flashers............................ 71

Headlamp pattern adjustment Active Bending Lights (ABL) .............. 190

Headlamps................................................. 58

Head restraint.......................................... 118

Heatingfront seats....................................... 93, 97rearview and door mirrors.............. 93, 97rear window.................................... 93, 97

High-pressure headlamp washing............. 65

HomeLink ................................................ 84

Home safe lighting............................... 62, 77setting................................................... 82

I

IDIS – Intelligent Driver Information Sys-tem........................................................... 267

Ignition keys............................................. 153

IMEI number............................................ 272

Immobiliser...................................... 126, 153

Inflatable Curtain........................................ 26

Information display.................................... 54

Information on fuel................................... 144

Infotainment systemmenus................................................. 250

Inlaid mats............................................... 110

Instrument lighting..................................... 59

Instrument overviewleft-hand drive....................................... 44right-hand drive.................................... 46

Interior lighting, see Lighting................... 111

Interior rearview mirror............................... 75automatic dimming............................... 75

Intermittent wiping..................................... 65

iPod , connection................................... 252

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats......... 37

J

Jack......................................................... 199

K

Kerb weight.............................................. 287

Keykeyless lock and ignition system........ 130remote control key.............................. 126

Key blade......................................... 127, 131active locks......................................... 129

Keyless drive............................ 130, 156, 302starting the car.................................... 156

Keyless entry............................................. 82

Keyless start (keyless drive)..................... 130

Keypad in the steering wheel...... 68, 70, 268

Key positions........................................... 152

Kick-downautomatic gearbox.............................. 159


12

311

L

Lambda-sond.......................................... 145

Leather upholstery, washing instructions 212

LightingActive Xenon headlamps...................... 59approach light, duration............... 77, 126automatic lighting............................... 112automatic lighting, dipped beam.......... 58bulbs, specifications........................... 300cargo area........................................... 111dipped beam........................................ 58display lighting...................................... 59front fog lamps..................................... 59headlamp levelling................................ 58home safe lighting.......................... 62, 77in passenger compartment................. 111lighting panel, passenger compart-ment...................................................... 58main/dipped beam......................... 58, 62position/parking lamps......................... 58reading lamps..................................... 111rear fog lamp........................................ 59

Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 234bulb holder, rear................................. 238cargo area........................................... 238dipped beam...................................... 235

direction indicators............................. 236fog lamp.............................................. 237front.................................................... 234main beam.......................................... 235number plate lighting.......................... 238parking lamps..................................... 236passenger compartment lighting incargo area........................................... 239position lamps.................................... 236side marker lamps.............................. 236vanity mirror........................................ 239

Loadinggeneral................................................ 189load capacity...................................... 189load retaining eyelets.......................... 122

Load retaining eyelets.............................. 122

Locking.................................................... 131unlocking............................................ 134

Locking/unlocking................................... 134inside.................................................. 134outside................................................ 134

Lockslocking................................................ 134

Lubricants................................................ 292

Lubricants, capacities.............................. 292

M

Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 58

Main beamflashing................................................. 62

Main beam "flash"..................................... 62

Maintenance............................................ 219rustproofing........................................ 215self-maintenance................................ 219

Making calls..................................... 269, 277

Manual gearbox....................................... 157GSI - Gear selector assistance... 157, 164towing and recovery........................... 176

Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 158

Max. roof load ......................................... 287

Memory function in seats........................ 107

Menusaudio system...................................... 250

Menu structure.......................................... 81media player....................................... 265phone, menu options.......................... 274phone, overview................................. 273

Messages in BLIS.................................... 174

Messages in the information display......... 54


12

312

Meters in the combined instrument panelfuel gauge............................................. 49outside temperature gauge.................. 49speedometer......................................... 49tachometer........................................... 49trip meter.............................................. 49

Mistingattending to the windows..................... 90condensation in headlamps............... 210rear window.......................................... 93removing with defroster function.... 93, 96timer function.................................. 93, 96

Mobile phoneconnect............................................... 278handsfree............................................ 276register phone..................................... 276

Mounting points (child seat)...................... 40

N

News........................................................ 259

O

Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 222, 290

Oil level low.............................................. 222

One-key dial............................................. 271

Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 13

Oxyhydrogen gas.................................... 180

P

PACOS....................................................... 22

PACOS, switch.......................................... 22

Paintworkcolour code......................................... 214damage and touch-up........................ 214

Parking assistance................................... 171parking assistance sensors................ 172

Parking brake....................................... 52, 72

Parking heaterbattery and fuel..................................... 99general.................................................. 99parking on a hill.................................... 99symbols and display messages.......... 100time setting......................................... 101

Passenger compartment filter................... 90

Passenger compartment heaterfuel-driven............................................. 99

Personal preferences................................. 81approach light, duration....................... 82auto blower adjust................................ 81automatic locking................................. 82doors unlock......................................... 82home safe lighting................................ 82keyless entry......................................... 82lock confirm. light................................. 82recirculation timer................................. 81unlock confirm. light............................. 82

Petrol grade............................................. 145

Phonecalling from the phone book............... 271connect............................................... 278controls............................................... 268entering text........................................ 270handsfree............................................ 276incoming calls..................................... 277making calls........................................ 277on/off.................................................. 269one-key dial........................................ 271phone book......................................... 279phone book, shortcut......................... 279receiving a call.................................... 277register phone..................................... 276


12

313

standby, standby mode...................... 269traffic safety........................................ 268

Phone bookhandling numbers............................... 270

Phone system.......................................... 267

Pinch protection, sunroof.......................... 80

Polishing.................................................. 211

Power seat............................................... 106

Powershift gearbox.......................... 160, 176

Power steering fluid, checking and toppingup............................................................. 227

Power sunroof........................................... 79

Power windows......................................... 73passenger seat..................................... 74

Programme type...................................... 260

PTY – Programme type........................... 260

Puncture, see Tyres......................... 199, 201

Putting calls on hold................................ 269

R

RadioEON.................................................... 261frequency update................................ 260

news................................................... 259programme types............................... 258radio settings...................................... 257radio stations...................................... 257REG.................................................... 260

Radio text................................................ 260

Rain sensor................................................ 66

Random, CD and audio files.................... 263

RDS functions.......................................... 258resetting.............................................. 261

Reading lamps, see Lighting................... 111

Rear seat.................................................. 118boarding............................................. 107

Rearview and door mirrorsautomatic retracting/extending...... 77, 82compass............................................... 75door...................................................... 77electrically retractable........................... 77interior................................................... 75

RecirculationA/C........................................................ 92ECC...................................................... 96

Recommended child seats ....................... 31

Reduced guardsettings................................................. 82

Refrigerant................................................. 90

Refuellingfuel cap............................................... 144fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 144refuelling............................................. 144

Refusing a call......................................... 269

REG - Regional radio programmes......... 260

Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 240

Remote control........................................ 126replacing the battery........................... 133

Remote control, HomeLink programmable ..................................... 84

Remote control key................................. 153battery replacement............................ 133detachable key blade......................... 127functions............................................. 126

Remote control key system, type appro-val............................................................ 302

Resetting the door mirrors......................... 77

Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 157

Rimscleaning.............................................. 210

Roof load, max. weight ........................... 287

Rustproofing............................................ 215


12

314

S

Safetysafety systems, table............................ 29

Safety net................................................. 122

ScanCD and audio files.............................. 263radio stations...................................... 258

Seatbeltpregnancy............................................. 17seatbelt guide....................................... 18seatbelt tensioner................................. 18

Seatbelt reminder...................................... 17

Seatbelts.................................................... 16

Seatshead restraints, rear............................ 118lowering the rear backrest.................. 118manual setting.................................... 106power seat.......................................... 106

Securing loads ........................................ 122

Service programme................................. 218

Side airbags............................................... 24

Side airbag SIPS........................................ 24

SIM card.................................................. 267

SIPS bags.................................................. 24

SMS......................................................... 272read..................................................... 272write.................................................... 272

Soot filter........................................... 54, 147

Soot filter full............................................ 147

Soundaudio settings............................. 252, 254audio source....................................... 252volume................................................ 252

Spare wheel............................................. 199temporary spare......................... 197, 199

Spin control............................................. 169

SRS systemgeneral.................................................. 20

Stability and traction control system....... 169

Stains....................................................... 211

Standby, phone....................................... 269

Start assistance....................................... 180

Starting the engine.................................. 152keyless drive............................... 130, 156

Steering lock............................................ 152

Steering wheelcruise control........................................ 68keypad.................................... 68, 70, 268steering wheel adjustment.................... 71

Stone chips and scratches...................... 214

Storage compartment.............................. 114CD discs............................................. 116

Storage spaces in the passenger compart-ment......................................................... 114

Storing stations, manual and automatic.. 257

Streaming audio...................................... 254

Subwoofer............................................... 254

Sunroof...................................................... 79opening and closing....................... 79, 80pinch protection.................................... 80sunscreen............................................. 80ventilation position................................ 79

Sunscreen, sunroof.................................... 80

Surround.......................................... 251, 255

Symbols................................................... 170indicator symbols........................... 51, 52warning symbols................................... 50

Symbols and display messagesparking heater..................................... 100


12

315

T

Tailgatedriving with open tailgate................... 143locking/unlocking........................ 126, 134

Tank volume............................................ 292

Technical data, engine............................. 289

Temperatureactual temperature............................... 91passenger compartment, electronic cli-mate control.......................................... 97passenger compartment, manual cli-mate control.......................................... 94

Testing the alarm system......................... 138

TimerA/C........................................................ 93ECC...................................................... 96

Tools........................................................ 199

Total airing function................................. 135

Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 183

Towing..................................................... 176towing eye.......................................... 178

Towing capacity....................................... 287

Towing equipment................................... 183installation........................................... 185

removing............................................. 187specifications...................................... 184

Towing eye.............................................. 178

TP – Traffic information............................ 259

Traffic information.................................... 259

Trailer....................................................... 181cable................................................... 183

Trip computer............................................ 63

Tuning Radio............................................ 257

Type approval, remote control key sys-tem........................................................... 302

Type designation..................................... 284

Tyresdirection of rotation............................ 197driving characteristics......................... 194general................................................ 194maintenance....................................... 194pressure...................................... 198, 298puncture repair................................... 203specifications...................................... 194speed ratings...................................... 194tread wear indicators.......................... 195winter tyres......................................... 197

U

Unlocking......................................... 131, 134settings................................................. 82

Upper mounting points, child seat............ 40

USB, connection...................................... 252

V

Ventilation.................................................. 91

Vibration damper..................................... 183

Volumeaudio system...................................... 252auto volume control............................ 255media player....................................... 252

W

Warning lampstability and traction control system. . 169

Warning symbol, airbag system................ 19

Warning triangle....................................... 199

Washer fluid, filling................................... 225


12

316

Washersheadlamps............................................ 65rear window.......................................... 66washer fluid, filling.............................. 225windscreen........................................... 65

Waxing..................................................... 211

Weightskerb weight......................................... 287

Wheelschanging............................................. 201installation........................................... 202removal............................................... 201rims..................................................... 196snow chains........................................ 196spare wheel........................................ 199

Whiplash injury.......................................... 27

WHIPSchild seat/booster cushion................... 27whiplash injury...................................... 27

Windscreen wipers.................................... 65rain sensor............................................ 66

Winter tyres.............................................. 197

Wiperrear window.......................................... 66

Wiper blades............................................ 228cleaning.............................................. 228

replacing, rear window....................... 228replacing, windscreen......................... 228

VOLVO C30 Owners Manual · 2014. 11. 19. · Change of ownership for cars with Volvo On Call *...

Documents

Transcript of VOLVO C30 Owners Manual · 2014. 11. 19. · Change of ownership for cars with Volvo On Call *...